WO2011096298A1 - Display element - Google Patents
Display element Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2011096298A1 WO2011096298A1 PCT/JP2011/051288 JP2011051288W WO2011096298A1 WO 2011096298 A1 WO2011096298 A1 WO 2011096298A1 JP 2011051288 W JP2011051288 W JP 2011051288W WO 2011096298 A1 WO2011096298 A1 WO 2011096298A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- group
- display element
- electrode
- atom
- compound
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Ceased
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour
- G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
- G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
- G02F1/1333—Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
- G02F1/1335—Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
- G02F1/133553—Reflecting elements
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F2202/00—Materials and properties
- G02F2202/40—Materials having a particular birefringence, retardation
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a display element, and more particularly to a display element with reduced power consumption.
- the method using a polarizing plate such as a reflective liquid crystal has a low reflectance of about 40%, which makes it difficult to display white, and it is difficult to say that many of the manufacturing methods used to manufacture the constituent members are simple.
- the polymer dispersed liquid crystal requires a high voltage and utilizes the difference in refractive index between organic substances, so that the resulting image has insufficient contrast.
- the polymer network type liquid crystal has problems such as a high driving voltage and a need for a complicated TFT circuit in order to improve memory performance.
- a display element based on electrophoresis requires a high voltage of 10 V or more, and there is a concern about durability due to aggregation of electrophoretic particles.
- an electrochromic display element can be driven at a low voltage with a simple member structure, and can display a relatively bright white display or a black and white display with a high contrast, and is expected to be applied to electronic paper, electronic books, and the like.
- Various methods are disclosed (for example, refer to Patent Documents 1 and 2).
- the electrochromic display element like the electrophoretic display element, performs colored display by light absorption by the dye, and therefore, in order to obtain a sufficient contrast ratio, the thickness of the colored material is required.
- the occupied volume ratio will increase. For this reason, there are problems such that the drive voltage becomes high and viewing angle dependency occurs, so that high-resolution display cannot be performed. Therefore, there has been a demand for a display element that efficiently obtains a high contrast ratio with a smaller amount of coloring material.
- the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a display element that can obtain a good contrast ratio with a smaller amount of coloring material, that is, a good contrast ratio with low power consumption. There is to do.
- a display element having a color space between at least a pair of opposing electrodes, wherein the color space satisfies the following formulas (1) and (2).
- n 2 ⁇ d 2 ⁇ 90 or n 2 ⁇ d 2 ⁇ 185 Formula (2) 100 ⁇ n 1 ⁇ d 1 ⁇ 175 [Where n 1 and d 1 are the refractive index n 1 and thickness d 1 (nm) of the coloring space when the display element is colored (or black), respectively, and n 2 and d 2 are The refractive index n 2 and the thickness d 2 (nm) of the coloring space in the white display state. ] 2.
- an electrolyte is further contained between the pair of opposed electrodes, and the coloring space contains an electrochromic compound.
- Rl 1 represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group
- Rl 2 and Rl 3 each represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
- X represents> N—Rl 4 , an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom
- Rl 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
- Rl 21 and Rl 22 each represents an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, an acylamino group, a carbamoyl group, an acyl group, a sulfonamide group or a sulfamoyl group
- Rl 23 represents an aromatic group or an aromatic heterocyclic group
- Rl 24 represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group or an aromatic heterocyclic group
- Rl 25 represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group or an acyl group.
- Rg 11 -S-Rg 12 each represent a substituted or unsubstituted hydrocarbon group. Further, these hydrocarbon groups may contain one or more nitrogen atom, oxygen atom, phosphorus atom, sulfur atom or halogen atom, and Rg 11 and Rg 12 may be connected to each other to take a cyclic structure. ]
- M represents a hydrogen atom, a metal atom or quaternary ammonium.
- Z represents an atomic group necessary for constituting a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring.
- n represents an integer of 0 to 5
- Rg 21 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkylcarbonamide group, an arylcarbonamide group, an alkylsulfonamide group, an arylsulfonamide group, an alkoxy group, an aryl Oxy group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, alkylcarbamoyl group, arylcarbamoyl group, carbamoyl group, alkylsulfamoyl group, arylsulfamoyl group, sulfamoyl group, cyano group, alkylsulfonyl group, arylsulfonyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group, Re
- the present inventors have found that in a display element having a color development space between at least a pair of opposed electrodes, the color development space satisfies the expressions (1) and (2). As a result of the present invention, it has been found that a display element capable of obtaining a good contrast ratio with a smaller amount of colorant and low power consumption can be realized.
- the display element of the present invention is characterized in that, in a display element having a color development space between at least a pair of opposed electrodes, the color development space satisfies the following formulas (1) and (2).
- n 1 and d 1 are the refractive index n 1 and the thickness d 1 (nm) of the coloring space when the display element is in a colored (or black) display state, respectively, and n 2 and d 2 are the white display of the display element, respectively.
- the refractive index n 2 and the thickness d 2 (nm) of the coloring space in the state are represented.
- FIG. 1 shows an example of the structure of the display element of the present invention.
- a typical display element 1 of the present invention at least one pair of counter electrodes is provided.
- a transparent electrode 5 such as an ITO electrode is provided as one of the counter electrodes close to the display portion, and a conductive electrode 2 is provided on the other electrode.
- a color development space 4 is provided between the transparent electrode 5 and the conductive electrode 2.
- the color development space 4 is a space in which visible light transmission and absorption can be reversibly switched by a voltage applied between a pair of counter electrodes.
- an electrochromic layer containing an electrochromic compound And a space on the electrode surface where metal ions in the electrolyte are deposited and dissolved.
- the visible light C reflected by the upper surface A and the lower surface B of the coloring space 4 is shifted by about 1 ⁇ 2 wavelength when the display element 1 is in a colored display state, the visible light is reflected by the interference of light. It is weakened and the color density is higher. Since the optical path difference between the reflected light C ′ from the upper surface A and the reflected light C ′′ from the lower surface B of the coloring space 4 is 2n 1 ⁇ d 1 , the value of 2n 1 ⁇ d 1 is about 1 ⁇ 2 wavelength.
- the phase of the visible light C reflected by the upper surface A and the lower surface B of the coloring space 4 is shifted by a half wavelength, since the wavelength of the visible light C is about 400 nm to 700 nm, so that 100 ⁇ n 1 ⁇ d 1 ⁇ 175.
- the reflection of visible light is weakened by the interference of light and the coloring density in the colored display state is higher, while the reflection of visible light C is not weakened by the interference of light when the color development space 4 is in the visible light transmission absorption state.
- the reflectance in the white display state can be increased, and the contrast ratio of the display element 1 can be increased, that is, the absorption of light due to light interference can be in the ultraviolet or infrared region.
- N 2 ⁇ d 2 ⁇ 9 0, or n 2 ⁇ d 2 ⁇ 185.
- the coloring space 4 contains an electrochromic compound as a colorant
- the electrochromic compound undergoes coloring and decoloring by electrical oxidation and reduction.
- ions in the electrolytic solution are present in the coloring space 4 to compensate for the charge.
- the refractive index n of the coloring space changes, and at the same time, the thickness d (nm) of the coloring space also changes.
- the type and addition amount of electrochromic dye constituting the color development space (volume ratio in the color development space), the existence form of the electrochromic dye in the color development space, and other members constituting the color development space, such as electrolysis
- the coloring space N 1 and n 2 are determined.
- d 1 and d 2 are set so as to satisfy the expressions (1) and (2) according to the n 1 and n 2 of the coloring space set as described above.
- the refractive index of the coloring space changes with the deposition of the metal.
- the thickness of the coloring space may change.
- the effects of the present invention can be obtained by appropriately setting the refractive index and thickness of the color development space of the display element as described above.
- an electrolyte is preferably contained between a pair of opposed electrodes.
- electrolyte generally refers to a substance that dissolves in a solvent such as water and exhibits a ionic conductivity in a solution (hereinafter referred to as “narrowly defined electrolyte”).
- Supporting electrolyte As the supporting electrolyte that can be used in the display element of the present invention, salts, acids, and alkalis that are usually used in the field of electrochemistry or the field of batteries can be used.
- the salts are not particularly limited, and for example, inorganic ion salts such as alkali metal salts and alkaline earth metal salts, quaternary ammonium salts, cyclic quaternary ammonium salts, quaternary phosphonium salts and the like can be used.
- inorganic ion salts such as alkali metal salts and alkaline earth metal salts, quaternary ammonium salts, cyclic quaternary ammonium salts, quaternary phosphonium salts and the like can be used.
- the salts include halogen ions, SCN ⁇ , ClO 4 ⁇ , BF 4 ⁇ , CF 3 SO 3 ⁇ , (CF 3 SO 2 ) 2 N ⁇ , (C 2 F 5 SO 2 ) 2 N ⁇ , PF Li salt, Na salt having a counter anion selected from 6 ⁇ , AsF 6 ⁇ , CH 3 COO ⁇ , CH 3 (C 6 H 4 ) SO 3 ⁇ , and (C 2 F 5 SO 2 ) 3 C ⁇ K salt is mentioned.
- halogen ions SCN ⁇ , ClO 4 ⁇ , BF 4 ⁇ , CF 3 SO 3 ⁇ , (CF 3 SO 2 ) 2 N ⁇ , (C 2 F 5 SO 2 ) 2 N ⁇ , PF 6 ⁇ , AsF 6 -, CH 3 COO -, CH 3 (C 6 H 4) SO 3 -, and (C 2 F 5 SO 2) 3 C - 4 quaternary ammonium salt having a counter anion selected from, specifically, (CH 3 ) 4 NBF 4 , (C 2 H 5 ) 4 NBF 4 , (n-C 4 H 9 ) 4 NBF 4 , (C 2 H 5 ) 4 NBr, (C 2 H 5 ) 4 NClO 4 , (n- C 4 H 9 ) 4 NClO 4 , CH 3 (C 2 H 5 ) 3 NBF 4 , (CH 3 ) 2 (C 2 H 5 ) 2 NBF 4 , (CH 3 ) 4 NSO 3
- halogen ions SCN ⁇ , ClO 4 ⁇ , BF 4 ⁇ , CF 3 SO 3 ⁇ , (CF 3 SO 2 ) 2 N ⁇ , (C 2 F 5 SO 2 ) 2 N ⁇ , PF 6 ⁇ , AsF 6 -, CH 3 COO -, CH 3 (C 6 H 4) SO 3 -, and (C 2 F 5 SO 2) 3 C - phosphonium salt having a counter anion selected from, specifically, (CH 3) 4 PBF 4 , (C 2 H 5 ) 4 PBF 4 , (C 3 H 7 ) 4 PBF 4 , (C 4 H 9 ) 4 PBF 4 and the like. Moreover, these mixtures can also be used suitably.
- the amount of the supporting electrolyte used is arbitrary, but in general, the supporting electrolyte is present in the solvent as an upper limit of 20 mol / L or less, preferably 10 mol / L or less, more preferably 5 mol / L or less.
- the lower limit is usually 0.01 mol / L or more, preferably 0.05 mol / L or more, more preferably 0.1 mol / L or more.
- the following compounds exhibiting electronic conductivity and ionic conductivity can be contained in the electrolyte.
- Fluorine-containing compounds such as chalcogenide, CaF 2 , PbF 2 , SrF 2 , LaF 3 , TlSn 2 F 5 , CeF 3 , Li salts such as Li 2 SO 4 , Li 4 SiO 4 , Li 3 PO 4 , ZrO 2 , CaO , Cd 2 O 3 , HfO 2 , Y 2 O 3 , Nb 2 O 5 , WO 3 , Bi 2 O 3 , AgBr, AgI, CuCl, CuBr, CuBr, CuI, LiI, LiBr, LiCl, LiAlCl 4 , LiAlF 4 , AgSBr, C 5 H 5 NHAg 5 I 6 , Rb 4 Cu 16 I Examples thereof include 7 Cl 13 , Rb 3 Cu 7 Cl 10 , LiN, Li 5 NI 2 , and Li 6 NBr 3 .
- the color space formed between a pair of opposing electrodes preferably contains an electrochromic compound.
- the electrochromic compound is preferably an organic dye.
- Examples of the conductive polymer compound exhibiting electrochromic properties include polypyrrole, polythiophene, polyisothianaphthene, polyaniline, polyphenylenediamine, polybenzidine, polyaminophenol, polyvinylcarbazole, polycarbazole, and derivatives thereof.
- organic dyes exhibiting electrochromic properties include pyridinium compounds such as viologen, azine dyes such as phenothiazine, styryl dyes, anthraquinone dyes, pyrazoline dyes, fluorane dyes, donor / acceptor compounds (for example, tetracyanoquino compounds) Dimethane, tetrathiafulvalene) and the like.
- pyridinium compounds such as viologen
- azine dyes such as phenothiazine, styryl dyes, anthraquinone dyes, pyrazoline dyes, fluorane dyes, donor / acceptor compounds (for example, tetracyanoquino compounds) Dimethane, tetrathiafulvalene) and the like.
- redox indicators and pH indicators can also be used.
- electrochromic compounds When the electrochromic compounds are classified according to color change, they can be divided into the following three classes.
- Class 1 An electrochromic compound that changes from one specific color to another by redox
- Class 2 An electrochromic compound that is substantially colorless in an oxidized state and exhibits a specific colored state that is a reduced state
- Class 3 An electrochromic compound that is substantially colorless in the reduced state and exhibits a specific colored state that is an oxidized state.
- the class 1 to class 3 electrochromic compounds can be appropriately selected depending on the purpose and application.
- a class 1 electrochromic compound is an electrochromic compound that changes from a specific color to another color by oxidation-reduction, and is a compound that can display two or more colors in its possible oxidation state.
- V 2 O 5 changes from orange to green by changing from an oxidation state to a reduction state
- Ru 2 O 3 changes from yellow to dark green
- polythiophene changes from blue to red by changing from an oxidized state to a reduced state
- polypyrrole changes from brown to yellow
- polyaniline or the like exhibits multi-color characteristics, and changes from an amber color in an oxidation state to blue, green, and light yellow.
- Class 2 electrochromic compounds are compounds that are colorless or extremely light in an oxidized state and exhibit a specific colored state that is a reduced state.
- Examples of the inorganic compounds classified as class 2 include the following compounds, each of which shows the color shown in parentheses in the reduced state. WO 3 (blue), MnO 3 (blue), Nb 2 O 5 (blue), TiO 2 (blue) and the like.
- organic dyes classified as class 2 include compounds described in JP-A Nos. 62-71934 and 2006-71765, such as dimethyl terephthalate (red) and 4,4′-biphenyl. Examples thereof include diethyl carboxylate (yellow), 1,4-diacetylbenzene (cyan), and tetrazolium salt compounds described in JP-A-1-230026, JP-T 2000-504774, and the like.
- the most representative dyes classified in class 2 are pyridinium compounds such as viologen.
- Viologen compounds have the advantages of vivid display images and the ability to change colors by changing substituents, so they are the most actively studied among organic dyes. Has been. Color development is based on organic radicals generated by reduction.
- pyridinium compounds such as viologen include compounds described in each of the following patent documents starting with JP-T-2000-506629.
- pyridinium compounds such as viologen that can be used in the present invention are shown below, but are not limited thereto.
- inorganic compounds classified as class 3 include iridium oxide (dark blue), Prussian blue (blue), etc. (each exhibiting the color shown in parentheses in the oxidized state).
- conductive polymers classified into class 3 There are few examples of conductive polymers classified into class 3, but examples include phenyl ether compounds described in JP-A-6-263846.
- dyes are known as class 3 dyes, but styryl dyes, azine dyes such as phenazine, phenothiazine, phenoxazine, and acridine, azole dyes such as imidazole, oxazole, and thiazole, etc. preferable.
- styryl dyes, azine dyes, and azole dyes that can be used in the present invention are exemplified, but the invention is not limited thereto.
- a metal salt that reversibly dissolves and precipitates by an electrochemical redox reaction is used in combination with the electrochromic dye, and a plurality of three or more colors of black display, white display, and color display other than black are used. Perform color display.
- the electrochromic dye is preferably a class 3 electrochromic compound that develops color by oxidation.
- an electrochromic compound represented by the following general formula (L) according to the present invention is preferable as the electrochromic compound.
- Rl 1 represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group
- Rl 2 and Rl 3 each represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent
- X represents> N—Rl 4 , an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom
- Rl 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
- Rl 1 represents an aryl group having a substituent
- the substituent is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include the following substituents.
- Alkyl groups eg, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, etc.
- cycloalkyl groups eg, cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl, etc.
- alkenyl, cycloalkenyl , Alkynyl groups eg, propargyl group, etc.
- glycidyl groups acrylate groups, methacrylate groups, aromatic groups (eg, phenyl group, naphthyl group, anthracenyl group, etc.), heterocyclic groups (eg, pyridyl group, thiazolyl group, oxazolyl group) Group, imidazolyl group, furyl group, pyrrolyl group, pyrazinyl group, pyrimidinyl group, pyridazinyl group, selenazolyl group, sriphoranyl
- Rl 1 is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group, more preferably a substituted or unsubstituted 2-hydroxyphenyl group or 4-hydroxyphenyl group.
- R1 2 or Rl 3 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include the substituents exemplified as the substituent on the aryl group of Rl 1 .
- Rl 2 and Rl 3 are each an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aromatic group, or a heterocyclic group, which may have a substituent.
- Rl 2 and Rl 3 may be connected to each other to form a ring structure.
- both of them may be a phenyl group or a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent, or one of them may be a phenyl group or a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent.
- the other is a combination of alkyl groups which may have a substituent.
- Rl 4 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aromatic group, a heterocyclic group or an acyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 5 to 10 carbon atoms, an acyl group It is a group.
- the compound represented by the general formula (L) according to the present invention has a group that chemically or physically adsorbs on the electrode surface.
- the chemical adsorption referred to in the present invention is a relatively strong adsorption state due to a chemical bond with the electrode surface
- the physical adsorption referred to in the present invention is a relatively strong van der Waals force acting between the electrode surface and the adsorbed substance. It is weakly adsorbed.
- the adsorptive group according to the present invention is preferably a chemisorbable group.
- Examples of the adsorptive group to be chemisorbed include —COOH, —P ⁇ O (OH) 2 , —OP ⁇ O (OH) 2 , Or -Si (OR) 3 (R represents an alkyl group) is preferable.
- an imidazole dye represented by the following general formula (L2) is particularly preferable.
- Rl 21 and Rl 22 each represents an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, an acylamino group, a carbamoyl group, an acyl group, a sulfonamido group, or a sulfamoyl group
- Rl 23 represents an aromatic group or Represents an aromatic heterocyclic group
- Rl 24 represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, or an aromatic heterocyclic group
- Rl 25 represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, or an acyl group.
- Rl 21 to Rl 25 may be further substituted with an arbitrary substituent. However, at least one of the groups represented by Rl 21 to Rl 25 has a partial structure of —COOH, —P ⁇ O (OH) 2 , —OP ⁇ O (OH) 2 , or —Si (OR) 3. (R represents an alkyl group).
- the group represented by Rl 21 or Rl 22 is preferably an alkyl group (particularly a branched alkyl group), a cycloalkyl group, an alkyloxy group, or a cycloalkyloxy group.
- Rl 23 is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group, a 5-membered or 6-membered heterocyclic group (for example, thienyl group, furyl group, pyrrolyl group, pyridyl group, etc.).
- Rl 24 is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group, a 5-membered or 6-membered heterocyclic group, or an alkyl group.
- Rl 25 is particularly preferably a hydrogen atom or an aryl group.
- At least one of the groups represented by Rl 21 to Rl 25 has a partial structure of —P ⁇ O (OH) 2 , —Si It is preferable to have (OR) 3 (R represents an alkyl group), and in particular, —Si (OR) 3 (R represents an alkyl group) as a partial structure of the group represented by Rl 23 or Rl 24 It is preferable to have.
- electrochromic dye represented by the general formula (L2) and specific examples of the electrochromic dye contained in the general formula (L) are shown below, although they do not correspond to the general formula (L2).
- the present invention is not limited only to these exemplified compounds.
- the metal salt compound according to the present invention is any compound as long as it contains a metal species that can be dissolved and precipitated by driving the counter electrode on at least one electrode on the counter electrode.
- a metal species that can be dissolved and precipitated by driving the counter electrode on at least one electrode on the counter electrode.
- Preferred metal species are silver, bismuth, copper, nickel, iron, chromium, zinc and the like, and particularly preferred are silver and bismuth.
- the silver salt compound according to the present invention is silver or a compound containing silver in the chemical structure, such as silver oxide, silver sulfide, metallic silver, silver colloidal particles, silver halide, silver complex compound, silver ion and the like.
- phase state species such as the solid state, the solubilized state in liquid, and the gas state, and the charged state species such as neutral, anionic, and cationic.
- a known silver salt compound such as a silver salt with an acid or a silver complex with iminodiacetic acid can be used.
- the silver salt a compound which does not have a nitrogen atom having a coordination property with halogen, carboxylic acid or silver, and for example, silver p-toluenesulfonate is preferable.
- the metal ion concentration contained in the electrolyte solution according to the present invention is preferably 0.2 mol / kg ⁇ [Metal] ⁇ 2.0 mol / kg. If the metal ion concentration is 0.2 mol / kg or more, a silver solution having a sufficient concentration can be obtained, and a desired driving speed can be obtained. If the metal ion concentration is 2 mol / kg or less, precipitation is prevented, and storage at low temperature is possible. The stability of the electrolyte solution is improved.
- a silver salt solvent can be used to promote dissolution and precipitation of metal salts (particularly silver salts).
- the silver salt solvent may be any compound that can solubilize silver in the electrolyte.
- a halogen atom, a mercapto group, a carboxyl group, an imino group, and the like are known. It is characterized by low influence on coexisting compounds and high solubility in solvents.
- the electrolyte preferably contains a compound represented by the general formula (G-1) or (G-2) as a silver salt solvent.
- Rg 11 and Rg 12 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted hydrocarbon group. These hydrocarbon groups may contain one or more nitrogen atoms, oxygen atoms, phosphorus atoms, sulfur atoms, and halogen atoms, and Rg 11 and Rg 12 may be linked to each other to form a cyclic structure.
- M represents a hydrogen atom, a metal atom, or quaternary ammonium.
- Z represents an atomic group necessary for constituting a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring.
- n represents an integer of 0 to 5
- Rg 21 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkylcarbonamide group, an arylcarbonamide group, an alkylsulfonamide group, an arylsulfonamide group, an alkoxy group, an aryl Oxy group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, alkylcarbamoyl group, arylcarbamoyl group, carbamoyl group, alkylsulfamoyl group, arylsulfamoyl group, sulfamoyl group, cyano group, alkylsulfonyl group, arylsulfonyl group, alkoxycarbonyl
- Rg 11 and Rg 12 each represent a substituted or unsubstituted hydrocarbon group, and in these hydrocarbon groups, one or more nitrogen atoms, oxygen atoms, phosphorus atoms, sulfur An atom may be included, and Rg 11 and Rg 12 may be connected to each other to take a cyclic structure.
- groups that can be substituted for the hydrocarbon group include amino groups, guanidino groups, quaternary ammonium groups, hydroxyl groups, halogen compounds, carboxylic acid groups, carboxylate groups, amide groups, sulfinic acid groups, sulfonic acid groups, and sulfates. Groups, phosphonic acid groups, phosphate groups, nitro groups, cyano groups and the like.
- G1-1 CH 3 SCH 2 CH 2 OH G1-2: HOCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 OH G1-3: HOCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 OH G1-4: HOCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 OH G1-5: HOCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 OH G1-6: HOCH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 OH G1-7: H 3 CSCH 2 CH 2 COOH G1-8: HOOCCH 2 SCH 2 COOH G1-9: HOOCCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 COOH G1-10: HOOCCH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 COOH G1-11: HOOCCH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 COOH G1-12: HOOCCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH (OH)
- Exemplified Compounds G1-2 and G1-3 are particularly preferable from the viewpoint that the object and effects of the present invention can be exhibited.
- M represents a hydrogen atom, a metal atom, or quaternary ammonium.
- Z represents an atomic group necessary for constituting a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring.
- n represents an integer of 0 to 5
- Rg 21 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkylcarbonamide group, an arylcarbonamide group, an alkylsulfonamide group, an arylsulfonamide group, an alkoxy group, an aryl Oxy group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, alkylcarbamoyl group, arylcarbamoyl group, carbamoyl group, alkylsulfamoyl group, arylsulfamoyl group, sulfamoyl group, cyano group, alkylsulfonyl group, arylsulfonyl group, alkoxycarbonyl
- examples of the metal atom represented by M include Li, Na, K, Mg, Ca, Zn, Ag, and the like.
- examples of the quaternary ammonium include NH 4 , N (CH 3 ) 4 , N (C 4 H 9 ) 4 , N (CH 3 ) 3 C 12 H 25 , N (CH 3 ) 3 C 16 H 33 , N (CH 3 ) 3 CH 2 C 6 H 5 Etc.
- Examples of the nitrogen-containing heterocycle having Z as a constituent in the general formula (G-2) include, for example, a tetrazole ring, a triazole ring, an imidazole ring, an oxadiazole ring, a thiadiazole ring, an indole ring, an oxazole ring, a benzoxazole ring, Examples include a benzimidazole ring, a benzothiazole ring, a benzoselenazole ring, and a naphthoxazole ring.
- the specific group represented by Rg 21 is a halogen atom (eg, fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom) alkyl group (eg, methyl, ethyl, propyl) I-propyl, butyl, t-butyl, pentyl, cyclopentyl, hexyl, cyclohexyl, octyl, dodecyl, hydroxyethyl, methoxyethyl, trifluoromethyl, benzyl, etc.), aryl group (eg, phenyl, naphthyl, etc.), alkylcarboxylic Amido group (eg, acetylamino, propionylamino, butyroylamino, etc.), arylcarbonamide group (eg, benzoylamino, etc.), alkylsulfonamide group (eg, methane
- halogen atom
- Exemplified Compounds G2-12, G2-18, and G2-20 are particularly preferable from the viewpoint that the objective effects of the present invention can be exhibited.
- an auxiliary compound that can be oxidized and reduced may be added in addition to the electrochromic compound.
- the promoter may be one that does not change the optical density in the visible region (400 to 700 nm) as a result of the oxidation-reduction reaction, or one that changes, that is, the electrochromic compound, and is immobilized on the electrode. It may be added to the electrolyte.
- These promoters can be used, for example, as counter electrode reactants or as redox mediators.
- the redox mediator is a material generally used in the field of organic electrolytic synthesis.
- Each organic compound has an oxidation overvoltage that depends on the electrolysis method and electrolysis conditions in addition to its own oxidation potential.
- an oxidation reaction actually occurs. Due to experimental limitations on the anodic potential, it is not possible to oxidize all substrates by direct methods.
- a substrate having a high oxidation potential is oxidized, no electron transfer from the substrate to the anode occurs.
- a mediator that causes electron transfer (oxidation) to the anode at a low potential coexists in this reaction system, the mediator is first oxidized, and the substrate is oxidized by the oxidized mediator to obtain a product.
- the present invention for example, when an electrochromic compound that oxidizes and colors is used as the substrate, it is possible to drive the display element with a low driving voltage by coexisting an oxidation mediator of the catalyst, and the durability of the display element is improved. Rise. In addition, there are advantages such as an improvement in display switching speed and high coloring efficiency. Similarly, the above-described effect can be obtained by a combination of a reducing mediator and an electrochromic compound that produces a reducing color.
- a promoter may be used as a counter electrode reactant or a mediator.
- a plurality of promoters may be used in combination at the same time.
- the promoter is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected depending on the purpose.
- a known electrochromic compound can be used.
- a redox mediator according to the characteristics of the electrochromic compound used as the display dye, Journal of Organic Synthetic Chemistry, Vol. 43, No. 6 (Special Issue on “Organic Synthesis Using Electric Energy”) (1985), etc.
- the known mediators described in 1) can be appropriately selected and used.
- N-oxyl also called nitroxide radical
- nitroxide radical is an oxygen-centered radical generated by radically cleaving the oxygen-hydrogen bond of hydroxylamine.
- Nitroxide radicals are known to have two reversible redox pairs as shown in the scheme below.
- the nitroxide radical becomes an oxoammonium cation by one-electron oxidation, which is reduced to regenerate the radical.
- the nitroxide radical is converted into an aminoxy anion by one-electron reduction, which is oxidized to regenerate the radical. Therefore, the nitroxide radical can function as a p-type counter electrode reactant or an n-type counter electrode reactant.
- the N-oxyl derivative is immobilized on the electrode surface by introducing a group that chemically or physically adsorbs to the electrode surface into the N-oxyl derivative, or by polymerizing the N-oxyl derivative to form a thin film on the electrode surface.
- the method of doing is mentioned.
- the N-oxyl derivative may be added in the form of an N-oxyl radical, or in the form of an N-hydroxy compound, and further in the form of an oxoammonium cation.
- N-hydroxyphthalimide derivatives N-hydroxyphthalimide derivatives, hydroxamic acid derivatives, etc.
- PINO phthalimide N-oxyl
- NHPI N-hydroxyphthalimide
- THICA trihydroxyimino cyanuric acid
- the display element of the present invention is produced using these compounds, it is preferably added in the state of N—OH. After the display element is manufactured in the N—OH state, radicals are generated by driving the display element and performing oxidation.
- the promoter shown in the above category 1) can be represented by the following general formula (M1), and promoters represented by the following general formulas (M2) to (M5) are preferable.
- a polycyclic N-oxyl derivative represented by the general formula (M6) is preferable.
- Promoters obtained by polymerizing these are, for example, JP-A Nos. 2004-227946, 2004-228008, 2006-73240, 2007-35375, 2007-70384, and 2007-184227. No. 2007, No. 2007-298713, and the like can be synthesized.
- Examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon group include a phenyl group and a naphthyl group.
- Examples of the heterocyclic group include a pyridyl group, a thiazolyl group, an oxazolyl group, an imidazolyl group, a furyl group, a pyrrolyl group, a pyrazinyl group, a pyrimidinyl group, and a pyridazinyl group.
- substituents may further have a substituent.
- substituents are not particularly limited, and examples thereof include alkyl groups (for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, tert-butyl group, pentyl group, hexyl group, octyl group, dodecyl group, tridecyl group, Tetradecyl group, pentadecyl group etc.), cycloalkyl group (eg cyclopropyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group etc.), alkenyl group (eg vinyl group, allyl group, butenyl group, octenyl group etc.), cycloalkenyl group (eg 2-cyclopenten-1-yl group, 2-cyclohexen-1-yl group, etc.), alkynyl group (eg, propargyl group, ethynyl group, trimethylsilyleth
- the compound represented by the general formula (M1) may be a multimer such as a dimer or a trimer linked by these substituents, or may be a polymer.
- Rm 21 , Rm 22 , Rm 23 and Rm 24 are each independently an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group or a heterocyclic group which may have a hydrogen atom or a substituent. These aliphatic hydrocarbon groups, aromatic hydrocarbon groups, and heterocyclic groups have the same meanings as those in formula (M1).
- Z 1 represents an atomic group necessary for forming a cyclic structure, and preferably forms a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring.
- Z 1 may further have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the same substituents as exemplified in the general formula (M1).
- the atoms constituting Rm 21 to Rm 24 and Z 1 may be linked to each other to form a cyclic structure.
- a polycyclic structure such as an azanorbornene structure or an azaadamantane structure is taken together with a nitrogen atom. Also good.
- Rm 31 is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or aromatic hydrocarbon which may be substituted directly or substituted with a carbonyl carbon atom via an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom or a sulfur atom.
- Rm 32 represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, or a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent.
- Rm 31 and Rm 32 may be connected to each other to form a ring structure.
- the N-oxyl derivative according to the present invention is a compound represented by the general formula (M3).
- Rm 31 is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may be substituted, or an aromatic hydrocarbon, which is substituted directly or through a oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom or a sulfur atom with a carbonyl carbon atom.
- Rm 32 represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, or a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent, and these aliphatic hydrocarbon group, aromatic carbon group About a hydrogen group and a heterocyclic group, it is synonymous with each in general formula (M1).
- Rm 31 and Rm 32 may be connected to each other to form a cyclic structure.
- Rm 32 is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group, particularly preferably a phenyl group which may have a substituent.
- the substituent on the phenyl group is preferably an electron-withdrawing group such as a cyano group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, or a trifluoromethyl group.
- Rm 31 is preferably a phenyl group or an aliphatic hydrocarbon group directly bonded to a carbonyl carbon atom, particularly preferably a branched alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group.
- the compound represented by the general formula (M3) is preferably added in the state of N—OH to produce a display element.
- Z 2 represents an atomic group necessary for forming a cyclic structure, and may further have a substituent.
- the N-oxyl derivative according to the present invention is a compound represented by the general formula (M4).
- Z 2 represents an atomic group necessary for forming a cyclic structure, and preferably forms a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring.
- Z 2 may further have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the substituents exemplified in Formula (M1).
- Z 2 may be a condensed ring.
- the compound represented by the general formula (M4) is preferably added in the state of N—OH to produce a display element.
- Rm 51 to Rm 55 each independently represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, or a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent.
- the N-oxyl derivative according to the present invention is a compound represented by the general formula (M5).
- Rm 51 to Rm 55 each independently represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, or a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent, and these aliphatic hydrocarbons
- the group, aromatic hydrocarbon group, and heterocyclic group have the same meanings as those in formula (M1).
- Rm 51 is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group, particularly preferably a phenyl group which may have a substituent.
- the substituent on the phenyl group is preferably an electron-withdrawing group such as a cyano group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, or a trifluoromethyl group.
- Rm 52 to Rm 55 an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is preferable, and a methyl group is particularly preferable.
- Rm 61 and Rm 62 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent, and Z 3 , Z 4 and Z 5 form a cyclic structure. And n represents 0 or 1.
- formula (M6) represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may have a hydrogen atom or a substituent each independently Rm 61 and Rm 62, as the Rm 61 and Rm 62 or a hydrogen atom, carbon atoms 4
- the following linear alkyl groups are preferable, and at least one of Rm 61 and Rm 62 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
- Z 3 , Z 4 and Z 5 each represent an atomic group necessary for forming a cyclic structure (for example, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, etc.), and each preferably forms a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring.
- Z 3 , Z 4 and Z 5 may further have a substituent.
- N 0 or 1
- the electrolyte solvent used in the present invention is preferably an aprotic polar solvent, particularly propylene carbonate, ethylene carbonate, dimethyl sulfoxide, dimethoxyethane, acetonitrile, ⁇ -butyrolactone, sulfolane, dioxolane, dimethylformamide, dimethoxyethane, tetrahydrofuran, adiponitrile, Methoxyacetonitrile, dimethylacetamide, methylpyrrolidinone, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxolane, sulfolane, trimethyl phosphate and triethyl phosphate are preferred.
- the solvent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- L represents an oxygen atom or an alkylene group
- Rs 11 to Rs 14 each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, or an alkoxy group.
- Rs 21 and Rs 22 each represents an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, or an alkoxy group.
- L represents an oxygen atom or CH 2
- Rs 11 to Rs 14 each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, or an alkoxy group, These substituents may be further substituted with an arbitrary substituent.
- alkyl group examples include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a tert-butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, an octyl group, a dodecyl group, a tridecyl group, a tetradecyl group, and a pentadecyl group.
- cycloalkyl group such as phenyl group, naphthyl group, etc.
- cyclopentyl group examples include, for example, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, etc., alkoxyalkyl groups, such as ⁇ -methoxyethyl group, ⁇ -methoxypropyl group, etc. Examples thereof include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propyloxy group, a pentyloxy group, a hexyloxy group, an octyloxy group, and a dodecyloxy group.
- Rs 21 and Rs 22 each represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, or an alkoxy group.
- alkyl group examples include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a tert-butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, an octyl group, a dodecyl group, a tridecyl group, a tetradecyl group, and a pentadecyl group.
- cycloalkyl group such as phenyl group, naphthyl group, etc.
- cyclopentyl group examples include, for example, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, etc., alkoxyalkyl groups, such as ⁇ -methoxyethyl group, ⁇ -methoxypropyl group, etc. Examples thereof include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propyloxy group, a pentyloxy group, a hexyloxy group, an octyloxy group, and a dodecyloxy group.
- the exemplary compounds (S1-1), (S1-2), and (S2-3) are particularly preferable.
- the compounds represented by the general formulas (S1) and (S2) according to the present invention are one type of electrolyte solvent.
- another solvent is used as long as the object effects of the present invention are not impaired. Can be used together.
- examples of the solvent that can be used in the present invention include J.M. A. Riddick, W.M. B. Bunger, T.A. K. Sakano, “Organic Solvents”, 4th ed. , John Wiley & Sons (1986). Marcus, “Ion Solvation”, John Wiley & Sons (1985), C.I. Reichardt, “Solvents and Solvent Effects in Chemistry”, 2nd ed. VCH (1988), G .; J. et al. Janz, R.A. P. T.A. Tomkins, “Nonequeous Electrolytes Handbook”, Vol. 1, Academic Press (1972).
- Porous white scattering layer In the present invention, it is possible to have a porous white scattering layer containing a white scattering material from the viewpoint of further increasing display contrast and white display reflectance.
- substantially insoluble in the electrolyte solvent is defined as a state where the dissolved amount per kg of electrolyte solvent is 0 g or more and 10 g or less at a temperature of ⁇ 20 ° C. to 120 ° C.
- the amount of dissolution can be determined by a known method such as a component determination method using a chromatogram or a gas chromatogram.
- examples of the water-based polymer that is substantially insoluble in the electrolyte solvent include a water-soluble polymer and a polymer dispersed in the water-based solvent.
- water-soluble polymers include proteins such as gelatin and gelatin derivatives, or cellulose derivatives, natural compounds such as starch, gum arabic, dextran, pullulan, and carrageenan, and other natural compounds such as polyvinyl alcohol, polyethylene glycol, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, and acrylamide. Synthetic polymer compounds such as coalescence and derivatives thereof may be mentioned.
- gelatin derivatives include acetylated gelatin, phthalated gelatin, polyvinyl alcohol derivatives include terminal alkyl group-modified polyvinyl alcohol, terminal mercapto group-modified polyvinyl alcohol, and cellulose derivatives include hydroxyethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose, and the like.
- polyvinyl alcohol polyethylene glycol
- polyvinylpyrrolidone compounds can be preferably used.
- Polymers dispersed in an aqueous solvent include latexes such as natural rubber latex, styrene butadiene rubber, butadiene rubber, nitrile rubber, chloroprene rubber, isoprene rubber, polyisocyanate, epoxy, acrylic, silicon, polyurethane, Examples thereof include a thermosetting resin in which urea, phenol, formaldehyde, epoxy-polyamide, melamine, alkyd resin, vinyl resin and the like are dispersed in an aqueous solvent. Of these polymers, the water-based polyurethane resin described in JP-A-10-76621 is preferably used.
- the average molecular weight of the water-based polymer is preferably in the range of 10,000 to 2,000,000, more preferably in the range of 30,000 to 500,000 in terms of weight average.
- Examples of the white pigment applicable in the present invention include titanium dioxide (anatase type or rutile type), barium sulfate, calcium carbonate, aluminum oxide, zinc oxide, magnesium oxide and zinc hydroxide, magnesium hydroxide, magnesium phosphate, Magnesium hydrogen phosphate, alkaline earth metal salt, talc, kaolin, zeolite, acid clay, glass, organic compounds such as polyethylene, polystyrene, acrylic resin, ionomer, ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer resin, benzoguanamine resin, urea-formalin resin, A melamine-formalin resin, a polyamide resin, or the like may be used alone or in combination, or in a state having voids that change the refractive index in the particles.
- titanium dioxide anatase type or rutile type
- barium sulfate calcium carbonate
- aluminum oxide zinc oxide
- magnesium oxide and zinc hydroxide magnesium hydroxide
- magnesium phosphate Magnesium hydrogen
- titanium dioxide is preferably used among the above white pigments.
- titanium dioxide surface-treated with an inorganic oxide Al 2 O 3 , AlO (OH), SiO 2, etc.
- titanium dioxide that has been treated with an organic substance such as trimethylolethane, triethanolamine acetate, or trimethylcyclosilane is more preferably used.
- titanium oxide or zinc oxide from the viewpoint of preventing coloring at high temperatures and the reflectance of the element due to the refractive index.
- the water admixture of the water-based compound and the white pigment is preferably in a form in which the white pigment is dispersed in water according to a known dispersion method.
- the mixing ratio of the aqueous compound / white pigment is preferably 1 to 0.01 by volume, more preferably 0.3 to 0.05.
- the film thickness of the porous white scattering layer is preferably in the range of 5 to 50 ⁇ m, more preferably in the range of 10 to 30 ⁇ m.
- the coating method can be appropriately selected from known coating methods.
- air doctor coater, blade coater, rod coater, knife coater, squeeze coater, impregnation coater, reverse roller coater, transfer roller coater, curtain coater, double roller coater, slide hopper coater, gravure coater, kiss roll coater, bead coater examples include cast coaters, spray coaters, calendar coaters, and extrusion coaters.
- Porous as used in the present invention refers to the formation of a porous white scattering material by applying a water admixture of the water-based compound and the white pigment onto the electrode and drying it, and then the silver or silver is chemically treated on the scattering material. After supplying an electrolyte solution containing the compound contained in the structure, it can be sandwiched between opposing electrodes, giving a potential difference between the opposing electrodes, causing a silver dissolution precipitation reaction, and penetrating ions that can move between the electrodes Tell the state.
- aldehyde hardeners (formaldehyde, etc.), aziridine hardeners, epoxy hardeners, vinyl sulfone hardeners (N, N'-ethylene-bis (vinylsulfonylacetamide) Ethane, etc.), N-methylol hardeners (dimethylolurea, etc.), boric acid, metaboric acid or polymer hardeners (compounds described in JP-A-62-234157).
- gelatin it is preferable to use a vinyl sulfone type hardener or a chlorotriazine type hardener alone or in combination.
- boron-containing compounds such as boric acid and metaboric acid.
- Various chemical sensitizers noble metal sensitizers, photosensitive dyes, supersensitizers, couplers, high boiling solvents, antifoggants, stabilizers, development inhibitors, bleach accelerators, fixing accelerators, color mixing inhibitors, Formalin Scavenger, Toning Agent, Hardener, Surfactant, Thickener, Plasticizer, Slipper, Ultraviolet Absorber, Irradiation Dye, Filter Light Absorbing Dye, Antibacterial Agent, Polymer Latex, Heavy Metal, Antistatic Agent Further, a matting agent or the like can be contained as necessary.
- auxiliary layers such as a protective layer, a filter layer, an antihalation layer, a crossover light cut layer, and a backing layer, and may be contained in these auxiliary layers.
- the substrate constituting the display element of the present invention is preferably a transparent substrate.
- a transparent substrate include polyester (for example, polyethylene terephthalate), polyimide, polymethyl methacrylate, polystyrene, polypropylene, polyethylene, Polyamide, nylon, polyvinyl chloride, polyvinylidene chloride, polycarbonate, polyether sulfone, silicon resin, polyacetal resin, fluororesin, cellulose derivative, polyolefin film, plate-like substrate, glass substrate and the like are preferably used.
- the transparent substrate used in the present invention refers to a substrate having a transmittance for visible light of at least 50%.
- an opaque substrate such as an inorganic substrate such as a metal substrate or a ceramic substrate can be used.
- the surface resistance value indicating the conductivity of the display-side electrode is preferably 100 ⁇ / ⁇ or less, and more preferably 10 ⁇ / ⁇ or less.
- the thickness of the electrode is not particularly limited, but is generally 0.1 to 20 ⁇ m.
- a nanoporous electrode having a nanoporous structure can be provided on the surface of the display side electrode.
- This nanoporous electrode is substantially transparent when a display element is formed, and can carry an electroactive substance such as an electrochromic dye.
- the nanoporous structure referred to in the present invention refers to a state in which an infinite number of nanometer-sized pores exist in a layer and ionic species contained in the electrolyte can move within the nanoporous structure.
- a dispersion containing fine particles constituting the nanoporous electrode is formed in layers by an ink jet method, a screen printing method, a blade coating method, etc., and then heated at a predetermined temperature.
- a method of making porous by drying, baking, a method of making nanoporous by anodizing or photoelectrochemical etching after forming an electrode layer by sputtering, CVD, atmospheric pressure plasma, etc. Is mentioned.
- the sol-gel method, Adv. Mater It can also be formed by the method described in 2006, 18, 2980-2983.
- fine particles having an average particle diameter of about 5 nm to 10 ⁇ m.
- shape of the fine particles those having an arbitrary shape such as an indefinite shape, a needle shape, and a spherical shape can be used.
- metals such as platinum, gold, silver, copper, aluminum, zinc, nickel, titanium, bismuth and their alloys, carbon, etc. are also preferably used. be able to.
- auxiliary electrode An auxiliary electrode can be attached to at least one of the pair of opposing electrodes according to the present invention.
- the auxiliary electrode is preferably made of a material having a lower electrical resistance than the main electrode part.
- metals such as platinum, gold, silver, copper, aluminum, zinc, nickel, titanium, and bismuth and alloys thereof can be preferably used.
- the auxiliary electrode can be installed either between the main electrode portion and the substrate, or on the surface of the main electrode portion opposite to the substrate. In any case, it is only necessary that the auxiliary electrode is electrically connected to the main electrode portion.
- the arrangement pattern of the auxiliary electrodes There is no particular limitation on the arrangement pattern of the auxiliary electrodes. It can be appropriately formed according to the required performance, such as linear, mesh, or circular.
- the divided electrode parts may be connected to each other.
- the auxiliary electrode is required to be provided with a shape and frequency that do not impair the visibility of the display element.
- a known method can be used. For example, a patterning method by photolithography, a printing method, an ink jet method, electrolytic plating or electroless plating, or a method of forming a pattern by exposing and developing using a silver salt photosensitive material may be used.
- the line width and line interval of the auxiliary electrode pattern of the present invention may be arbitrary values, it is necessary to increase the line width in order to increase the conductivity.
- the area coverage of the auxiliary electrode viewed from the display element observation side is preferably 30% or less, and more preferably 10% or less.
- the line width of the auxiliary electrode is preferably 1 ⁇ m or more and 100 ⁇ m or less, and the line interval is preferably 50 ⁇ m to 1000 ⁇ m.
- a known method can be used to form the display-side electrode and the counter electrode (and auxiliary electrode). For example, mask deposition may be performed on the substrate by sputtering or the like, or patterning may be performed by photolithography after the entire surface is formed.
- electrodes can be formed by electrolytic plating, electroless plating, printing methods, and ink jet methods.
- an electrode pattern including a catalyst layer having a monomer polymerization ability on a substrate using an inkjet method a monomer component that is polymerized by the catalyst and becomes a conductive polymer layer after polymerization is added, It is also possible to form a metal electrode pattern by polymerizing and further performing metal plating such as silver on the conductive polymer layer, and the process is greatly reduced because no photoresist or mask pattern is used. It can be simplified.
- the electrode material is formed by coating
- known methods such as a dipping method, a spinner method, a spray method, a roll coater method, a flexographic printing method, and a screen printing method can be used.
- the following electrostatic inkjet can print a highly viscous liquid continuously with high accuracy, and is preferably used for forming the transparent electrode and the metal auxiliary electrode of the present invention.
- the viscosity of the ink is preferably 30 mPa ⁇ s or more, and more preferably 100 mPa ⁇ s or more.
- At least one of the transparent electrode of the composite electrode and the metal auxiliary electrode supplies a liquid discharge head having a nozzle with an internal diameter of 30 ⁇ m or less for discharging charged liquid, and a solution into the nozzle. It is preferably formed using a liquid discharge apparatus including a supply unit and a discharge voltage application unit that applies a discharge voltage to the solution in the nozzle.
- the solution in the nozzle is formed by using a discharge device provided with a convex meniscus forming means for forming a state where the solution rises in a convex shape from the nozzle tip.
- an operation control unit that controls application of a drive voltage for driving the convex meniscus forming unit and application of a discharge voltage by the discharge voltage application unit is provided, and the operation control unit applies the discharge voltage by the discharge voltage application unit. It is also preferable to use a liquid ejection apparatus having a first ejection control unit that applies a driving voltage to the convex meniscus forming means when ejecting liquid droplets while performing the above.
- an operation control unit that controls driving of the convex meniscus forming unit and voltage application by the discharge voltage applying unit is provided, and the operation control unit is configured to swell the solution by the convex meniscus forming unit and apply the discharge voltage.
- a second discharge control unit that performs synchronization with the liquid discharge device, wherein the operation control means is configured to supply the liquid at the tip of the nozzle after the swell operation of the solution and the application of the discharge voltage. It is also a preferred form to use a liquid discharge apparatus having a liquid level stabilization control unit that performs operation control for drawing the surface inward.
- the columnar structure provides strong self-holding (strength) between the substrates, for example, a columnar body, a quadrangular columnar body, an elliptical columnar body, a trapezoidal array arranged in a predetermined pattern such as a lattice arrangement.
- a columnar structure such as a columnar body can be given. Alternatively, stripes arranged at predetermined intervals may be used.
- This columnar structure is not a random array, but can be properly maintained at intervals of the substrate, such as an evenly spaced array, an array in which the interval gradually changes, and an array in which a predetermined arrangement pattern is repeated at a constant period.
- the arrangement is preferably considered so as not to disturb the display. If the ratio of the area occupied by the columnar structure to the display area of the display element is 1 to 40%, a practically sufficient strength as a display element can be obtained.
- a spacer may be provided between the pair of substrates for uniformly maintaining a gap between the substrates.
- the spacer include a sphere made of resin or inorganic oxide.
- a fixed spacer having a surface coated with a thermoplastic resin is also preferably used.
- the diameter of the spacer is equal to or less than the height of the columnar structure, preferably equal to the height. When the columnar structure is not formed, the spacer diameter corresponds to the cell gap thickness.
- the driving operation of the display element of the present invention may be simple matrix driving or active matrix driving.
- the simple matrix driving in the present invention is a driving method in which a current is sequentially applied to a circuit in which a positive line including a plurality of positive electrodes and a negative electrode line including a plurality of negative electrodes are opposed to each other in a vertical direction.
- the active matrix drive is a system in which scanning lines, data lines, and current supply lines are formed in a grid pattern, and are driven by TFT circuits provided in each grid pattern. Since switching can be performed for each pixel, there are merits such as gradation and memory function. For example, a circuit described in FIG. 5 of JP-A-2004-29327 can be used.
- the display element of the present invention can be used in an electronic book field, an ID card field, a public field, a traffic field, a broadcast field, a payment field, a distribution logistics field, and the like.
- keys for doors student ID cards, employee ID cards, various membership cards, convenience store cards, department store cards, vending machine cards, gas station cards, subway and railway cards, bus cards, Cash cards, credit cards, highway cards, driver's licenses, hospital examination cards, electronic medical records, health insurance cards, Basic Resident Registers, passports, electronic books, etc.
- Electrolyte 4 was prepared by dissolving 2 parts by mass.
- Electrolyte 5 was prepared by dissolving 2 parts by mass.
- Electrode 1 An ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) film having a thickness of 1 cm is formed as a conductive layer on a glass substrate having a thickness of 1.5 mm and a width of 2 cm ⁇ 4 cm according to a known method, thereby producing an electrode 1. did.
- ITO Indium Tin Oxide
- Electrode 2 On the ITO film-forming surface of the electrode 1, the following titanium dioxide dispersion was screen-printed so that the average film thickness after drying was 20 ⁇ m, and then dried at 50 ° C. for 30 minutes to evaporate the solvent.
- the electrode 2 having a porous white scattering layer was produced by drying in an atmosphere of 1 ° C. for 1 hour.
- Electrode 3 (Preparation of electrode 3) The electrode 1 and the platinum electrode are arranged at positions facing each other, and this electrode pair is immersed in a glass container containing the electrolyte 6 until the amount of electricity supplied between the electrode 1 and the platinum electrode is 12 mC / cm 2. A voltage of 3 V was applied, and a polypyrrole film formed by electrolytic polymerization of pyrrole was formed on the electrode 1. The electrode 1 on which the polypyrrole film was formed was taken out of the glass container, washed with ethanol, and dried to obtain an electrode 3.
- Electrode 4 On the surface of the electrode 1 on which the ITO film was formed, a titanium dioxide layer having a thickness of 0.085 ⁇ m (about 4 to 10 particles having an average particle diameter of 10 nm had been necked) was formed, whereby an electrode 4 was produced.
- ⁇ Preparation of treatment liquid 1> In 20 parts by mass of pure water, 0.05 part by mass of the following compound (A-1), 0.06 part by mass of the following compound (A-2), and 0.07 part of the following compound (A-3) A treatment liquid 1 was prepared by dissolving a part by mass.
- Electrode 7 On the ITO film forming surface of electrode 1, a 0.075 ⁇ m thick titanium dioxide layer (about 4 to 10 particles having an average particle diameter of 10 nm had been necked) was formed, and electrode 7 was produced.
- Electrode 9 (Preparation of electrode 9) The electrode 1 and the platinum electrode are arranged at opposite positions, and this electrode pair is immersed in a glass container containing the electrolyte 6 until the amount of electricity supplied between the electrode 1 and the platinum electrode is 40 mC / cm 2. A voltage of 3 V was applied, and a polypyrrole film formed by electrolytic polymerization of pyrrole was formed on the electrode 1. The electrode 1 on which the polypyrrole film was formed was taken out from the glass container, washed with ethanol, and dried to obtain an electrode 9.
- Electrode 12 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the electrode 6 except that the electrode 10 was used instead of the electrode 4.
- Electrode 13 On the surface of the electrode 1 on which the ITO film was formed, a titanium dioxide layer having a thickness of 0.06 ⁇ m (about 4 to 10 particles having an average particle diameter of 10 nm had been necked) was formed, whereby an electrode 13 was produced.
- Electrode 14 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the electrode 3 except that the electrode 13 was used instead of the electrode 1.
- Electrode 4 was immersed in the following treatment liquid 3 and allowed to stand at room temperature for about 24 hours, then washed with ethanol and dried to produce an electrode 16.
- a display element 2 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the display element 1 except that the electrode 5 was used instead of the electrode 3.
- a display element 4 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the display element 1 except that the electrode 8 was used instead of the electrode 3.
- a display element 6 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the display element 5 except that the electrolyte 3 was used instead of the electrolyte 2.
- a display element 9 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the display element 1 except that the electrode 9 was used instead of the electrode 3.
- a display element 10 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the display element 2 except that the electrode 11 was used instead of the electrode 5.
- a display element 12 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the display element 5 except that the electrode 1 was used instead of the electrode 13.
- a display element 13 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the display element 6 except that the electrode 1 was used instead of the electrode 13.
- a display element 14 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the display element 1 except that the electrode 14 was used instead of the electrode 3.
- a display element 16 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the display element 7 except that the electrode 15 was used instead of the electrode 13.
Landscapes
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Nonlinear Science (AREA)
- Mathematical Physics (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Optics & Photonics (AREA)
- Electrochromic Elements, Electrophoresis, Or Variable Reflection Or Absorption Elements (AREA)
- Devices For Indicating Variable Information By Combining Individual Elements (AREA)
Abstract
Description
本発明は、表示素子に関し、より詳しくは、消費電力を低減した表示素子に関するものである。 The present invention relates to a display element, and more particularly to a display element with reduced power consumption.
近年、パーソナルコンピューターの動作速度の向上、ネットワークインフラの普及、データストレージの大容量化と低価格化に伴い、従来、紙への印刷物として提供されていたドキュメントや画像等の情報を、より簡便な電子情報として入手、電子情報を閲覧する機会が益々増大している。 In recent years, with the increase in the operating speed of personal computers, the spread of network infrastructure, the increase in capacity and price of data storage, information such as documents and images that have been provided as printed materials on paper has become easier. Opportunities for obtaining and browsing electronic information are increasing.
この様な電子情報の閲覧手段として、従来の液晶ディスプレイやCRT、また近年では、有機エレクトロルミネッセンスディスプレイ等の発光型が主として用いられている。特に、電子情報がドキュメント情報の場合、比較的長時間にわたってこの閲覧手段を注視する必要があり、これらの行為は人間に優しい手段とは言い難く、一般に発光型のディスプレイの欠点として、フリッカーで目が疲労する、持ち運びが不便、読む姿勢が制限され、静止画面に視線を合わせる必要が生じる、長時間読むと消費電力が嵩む等が知られている。 As a means for browsing such electronic information, conventional liquid crystal displays and CRTs, and in recent years, light-emitting types such as organic electroluminescence displays are mainly used. In particular, when the electronic information is document information, it is necessary to keep an eye on the browsing means for a relatively long time. These actions are hardly human-friendly means. It is known that the user is tired, inconvenient to carry, limited reading posture, needs to be in line with the still screen, and consumes power when reading for a long time.
これらの欠点を補う表示手段として、外光を利用し、像保持の為に電力を消費しない、いわゆる「メモリー性」を有する反射型ディスプレイが知られているが、下記の理由で十分な性能を発揮しているとは言い難いのが現状である。 As a display means to compensate for these drawbacks, a reflection type display using so-called "memory" that uses external light and does not consume power for image retention is known. However, it has sufficient performance for the following reasons. It is hard to say that it is demonstrating.
すなわち、反射型液晶等の偏光板を用いる方式は、反射率が約40%と低いために白表示に難があり、また構成部材の作製に用いる製法の多くは簡便とは言い難い。また、ポリマー分散型液晶は高い電圧を必要とし、また有機物同士の屈折率差を利用しているため、得られる画像のコントラストが十分でない。また、ポリマーネットワーク型液晶は駆動電圧が高いことと、メモリー性を向上させるため、複雑なTFT回路が必要である等の課題を抱えている。また、電気泳動法による表示素子は、10V以上の高い電圧が必要となり、電気泳動性粒子の凝集による耐久性に懸念がある。 That is, the method using a polarizing plate such as a reflective liquid crystal has a low reflectance of about 40%, which makes it difficult to display white, and it is difficult to say that many of the manufacturing methods used to manufacture the constituent members are simple. In addition, the polymer dispersed liquid crystal requires a high voltage and utilizes the difference in refractive index between organic substances, so that the resulting image has insufficient contrast. In addition, the polymer network type liquid crystal has problems such as a high driving voltage and a need for a complicated TFT circuit in order to improve memory performance. In addition, a display element based on electrophoresis requires a high voltage of 10 V or more, and there is a concern about durability due to aggregation of electrophoretic particles.
一方、エレクトロクロミック方式の表示素子は、簡便な部材構成で、低電圧で駆動可能でき、比較的明るい白表示やコントラストの高い白黒表示ができるため、電子ペーパー、電子書籍等への応用が期待され、様々な方法が開示されている(例えば、特許文献1、2参照。)。 On the other hand, an electrochromic display element can be driven at a low voltage with a simple member structure, and can display a relatively bright white display or a black and white display with a high contrast, and is expected to be applied to electronic paper, electronic books, and the like. Various methods are disclosed (for example, refer to Patent Documents 1 and 2).
しかしながら、エレクトロクロミック方式の表示素子は、電気泳動表示素子と同様に、色素による光吸収によって着色表示を行うため、十分なコントラスト比を出すためには、着色物の厚みが必要となり、デバイス中に占める体積率が増大してしまう。そのため、駆動電圧が高くなったり、視野角依存性が発生するため、高解像度表示ができなかったりするなどの課題があった。そのため、より少ない発色色材量で効率よく高いコントラスト比を得る表示素子が求められていた。 However, the electrochromic display element, like the electrophoretic display element, performs colored display by light absorption by the dye, and therefore, in order to obtain a sufficient contrast ratio, the thickness of the colored material is required. The occupied volume ratio will increase. For this reason, there are problems such that the drive voltage becomes high and viewing angle dependency occurs, so that high-resolution display cannot be performed. Therefore, there has been a demand for a display element that efficiently obtains a high contrast ratio with a smaller amount of coloring material.
本発明は、上記課題に鑑みなされたものであり、その目的は、より少ない発色色材量で良好なコントラスト比を得る、すなわち低消費電力で良好なコントラスト比を得ることのできる表示素子を提供することにある。 The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a display element that can obtain a good contrast ratio with a smaller amount of coloring material, that is, a good contrast ratio with low power consumption. There is to do.
本発明の上記目的は、以下の構成により達成される。 The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following configuration.
1.少なくとも一対の対向する電極間に発色空間を有する表示素子において、該発色空間が下記式(1)及び(2)を満たすことを特徴とする表示素子。 1. A display element having a color space between at least a pair of opposing electrodes, wherein the color space satisfies the following formulas (1) and (2).
式(1)
n2・d2≦90、またはn2・d2≧185
式(2)
100≦n1・d1≦175
〔式中、n1、d1はそれぞれ表示素子が着色(または黒色)表示状態における発色空間の屈折率n1と厚さd1(nm)であり、n2、d2はそれぞれ表示素子が白色表示状態における発色空間の屈折率n2と厚さd2(nm)である。〕
2.前記一対の対向する電極間にさらに電解質を含有し、かつ前記発色空間がエレクトロクロミック化合物を含有することを特徴とする前記1に記載の表示素子。
Formula (1)
n 2 · d 2 ≦ 90 or n 2 · d 2 ≧ 185
Formula (2)
100 ≦ n 1 · d 1 ≦ 175
[Where n 1 and d 1 are the refractive index n 1 and thickness d 1 (nm) of the coloring space when the display element is colored (or black), respectively, and n 2 and d 2 are The refractive index n 2 and the thickness d 2 (nm) of the coloring space in the white display state. ]
2. 2. The display element according to 1, wherein an electrolyte is further contained between the pair of opposed electrodes, and the coloring space contains an electrochromic compound.
3.前記エレクトロクロミック化合物が、有機色素であることを特徴とする前記2に記載の表示素子。 3. 3. The display element according to 2 above, wherein the electrochromic compound is an organic dye.
4.前記エレクトロクロミック化合物が、下記一般式(L)で表される化合物であることを特徴とする前記2または3に記載の表示素子。 4. 4. The display element according to 2 or 3, wherein the electrochromic compound is a compound represented by the following general formula (L).
〔式中、Rl1は置換または無置換のアリール基を表し、Rl2、Rl3は各々水素原子または置換基を表す。Xは>N-Rl4、酸素原子または硫黄原子を表し、Rl4は水素原子または置換基を表す。〕
5.前記一般式(L)で表される化合物が、下記一般式(L2)で表される化合物であることを特徴とする前記4に記載の表示素子。
[Wherein, Rl 1 represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, and Rl 2 and Rl 3 each represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent. X represents> N—Rl 4 , an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and Rl 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. ]
5. 5. The display element according to 4 above, wherein the compound represented by the general formula (L) is a compound represented by the following general formula (L2).
〔式中、Rl21、Rl22は各々脂肪族基、脂肪族オキシ基、アシルアミノ基、カルバモイル基、アシル基、スルホンアミド基またはスルファモイル基を表し、Rl23は芳香族基または芳香族複素環基を表し、Rl24は水素原子、脂肪族基、芳香族基または芳香族複素環基を表し、Rl25は水素原子、脂肪族基、芳香族基またはアシル基を表す。〕
6.前記エレクトロクロミック化合物が、透明多孔質電極に固定されていることを特徴とする前記2から5のいずれか1項に記載の表示素子。
Wherein Rl 21 and Rl 22 each represents an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, an acylamino group, a carbamoyl group, an acyl group, a sulfonamide group or a sulfamoyl group, and Rl 23 represents an aromatic group or an aromatic heterocyclic group Rl 24 represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group or an aromatic heterocyclic group, and Rl 25 represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group or an acyl group. ]
6). 6. The display element according to any one of 2 to 5, wherein the electrochromic compound is fixed to a transparent porous electrode.
7.前記電解質中に金属塩化合物が含有され、かつ前記対向する電極の駆動操作により、黒表示と白表示とを行うことを特徴とする前記2から6のいずれか1項に記載の表示素子。 7. 7. The display element according to any one of 2 to 6, wherein a metal salt compound is contained in the electrolyte, and black display and white display are performed by a driving operation of the opposing electrode.
8.前記金属塩化合物が、銀塩化合物であることを特徴とする前記7に記載の表示素子。 8. 8. The display element according to 7 above, wherein the metal salt compound is a silver salt compound.
9.前記電解質が、さらに下記一般式(G-1)または(G-2)で表される化合物を含有することを特徴とする前記7または8に記載の表示素子。 9. 9. The display element as described in 7 or 8 above, wherein the electrolyte further contains a compound represented by the following general formula (G-1) or (G-2).
一般式(G-1)
Rg11-S-Rg12
〔式中、Rg11、Rg12は各々置換または無置換の炭化水素基を表す。また、これらの炭化水素基は、1個以上の窒素原子、酸素原子、リン原子、硫黄原子またはハロゲン原子を含んでも良く、Rg11とRg12が互いに連結し、環状構造を取っても良い。〕
General formula (G-1)
Rg 11 -S-Rg 12
[Wherein, Rg 11 and Rg 12 each represent a substituted or unsubstituted hydrocarbon group. Further, these hydrocarbon groups may contain one or more nitrogen atom, oxygen atom, phosphorus atom, sulfur atom or halogen atom, and Rg 11 and Rg 12 may be connected to each other to take a cyclic structure. ]
〔式中、Mは水素原子、金属原子または4級アンモニウムを表す。Zは含窒素複素環を構成するのに必要な原子群表す。nは0~5の整数を表し、Rg21は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、アルキルカルボンアミド基、アリールカルボンアミド基、アルキルスルホンアミド基、アリールスルホンアミド基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、アルキルカルバモイル基、アリールカルバモイル基、カルバモイル基、アルキルスルファモイル基、アリールスルファモイル基、スルファモイル基、シアノ基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、アルキルカルボニル基、アリールカルボニル基、アシルオキシ基、カルボキシル基、カルボニル基、スルホニル基、アミノ基、ヒドロキシ基または複素環基を表し、nが2以上の場合、それぞれのRg21は同じであってもよく、異なってもよく、お互いに連結して縮合環を形成してもよい。〕 [Wherein, M represents a hydrogen atom, a metal atom or quaternary ammonium. Z represents an atomic group necessary for constituting a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring. n represents an integer of 0 to 5, and Rg 21 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkylcarbonamide group, an arylcarbonamide group, an alkylsulfonamide group, an arylsulfonamide group, an alkoxy group, an aryl Oxy group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, alkylcarbamoyl group, arylcarbamoyl group, carbamoyl group, alkylsulfamoyl group, arylsulfamoyl group, sulfamoyl group, cyano group, alkylsulfonyl group, arylsulfonyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group, Represents an aryloxycarbonyl group, an alkylcarbonyl group, an arylcarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carboxyl group, a carbonyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a hydroxy group or a heterocyclic group, and when n is 2 or more, Of Rg 21 may be the same or different, and may be linked to each other to form a condensed ring. ]
本発明により、より少ない発色色材量で良好なコントラスト比を得る、すなわち低消費電力で良好なコントラスト比を得ることのできる表示素子を提供することができた。 According to the present invention, it has been possible to provide a display element that can obtain a good contrast ratio with a smaller amount of coloring material, that is, a good contrast ratio with low power consumption.
以下、本発明を実施するための形態について詳細に説明する。 Hereinafter, embodiments for carrying out the present invention will be described in detail.
本発明者は、上記課題に鑑み鋭意検討を行った結果、少なくとも一対の対向する電極間に発色空間を有する表示素子において、該発色空間が前記式(1)及び(2)を満たすことを特徴とする表示素子により、より少ない発色色材量、低消費電力で良好なコントラスト比を得ることのできる表示素子を実現できることを見出し、本発明に至った次第である。 As a result of intensive studies in view of the above problems, the present inventors have found that in a display element having a color development space between at least a pair of opposed electrodes, the color development space satisfies the expressions (1) and (2). As a result of the present invention, it has been found that a display element capable of obtaining a good contrast ratio with a smaller amount of colorant and low power consumption can be realized.
〔発色空間〕
本発明の表示素子においては、少なくとも一対の対向する電極間に発色空間を有する表示素子において、該発色空間が下記式(1)、(2)を満たすことを特徴とする。
[Color development space]
The display element of the present invention is characterized in that, in a display element having a color development space between at least a pair of opposed electrodes, the color development space satisfies the following formulas (1) and (2).
式(1)
n2・d2≦90、またはn2・d2≧185
式(2)
100≦n1・d1≦175
ただし、n1、d1はそれぞれ表示素子が着色(または黒色)表示状態における発色空間の屈折率n1と厚さd1(nm)であり、n2、d2はそれぞれ表示素子が白色表示状態における発色空間の屈折率n2と厚さd2(nm)を表す。
Formula (1)
n 2 · d 2 ≦ 90 or n 2 · d 2 ≧ 185
Formula (2)
100 ≦ n 1 · d 1 ≦ 175
However, n 1 and d 1 are the refractive index n 1 and the thickness d 1 (nm) of the coloring space when the display element is in a colored (or black) display state, respectively, and n 2 and d 2 are the white display of the display element, respectively. The refractive index n 2 and the thickness d 2 (nm) of the coloring space in the state are represented.
〔表示素子の基本構成〕
図1に、本発明の表示素子の構成の一例を示す。
[Basic structure of display element]
FIG. 1 shows an example of the structure of the display element of the present invention.
図1に示すように、代表的な本発明の表示素子1においては、少なくとも1対の対向電極が設けられている。表示部に近い対向電極の1つである電極としてはITO電極等の透明電極5、他方の電極には導電性電極2が設けられている。透明電極5と導電性電極2との間に、発色空間4を有する。対向電極間に正負両極性の電圧を印加することにより、白表示と着色表示を可逆的に切り替えることができる。発色空間4とは、1対の対向電極間に印加する電圧によって可視光の透過と吸収を可逆的に切り替えることができる空間のことであり、例えば、エレクトロクロミック化合物を含有させたエレクトロクロミック層や、電解質中の金属イオンが析出溶解する電極表面の空間などが挙げられる。また、表示コントラスト及び白表示反射率をより高める観点から、導電性電極2上には白色散乱性物質を含有する多孔質白色散乱層3を設けることが好ましい。
As shown in FIG. 1, in a typical display element 1 of the present invention, at least one pair of counter electrodes is provided. A transparent electrode 5 such as an ITO electrode is provided as one of the counter electrodes close to the display portion, and a
更に詳しくは、表示素子1が着色表示状態ときに発色空間4の上面Aと下面Bで反射した可視光Cの位相が1/2波長程度ずれている場合、光の干渉によって可視光の反射が弱められ、着色濃度がより高くなる。発色空間4の上面Aからの反射光C′と下面Bからの反射光C″の光路差が2n1・d1であるので、2n1・d1の値が1/2波長程度であると発色空間4の上面Aと下面Bで反射した可視光Cの位相が1/2波長ずれることになる。可視光Cの波長は400nm~700nm程度なので、100≦n1・d1≦175であると光の干渉によって可視光の反射が弱められ、着色表示状態の着色濃度がより高くなる。一方、発色空間4が可視光透過吸収状態のときには光の干渉によって可視光Cの反射が弱められないようにすることで、白色表示状態での反射率を高くすることができ、表示素子1のコントラスト比を高くすることができる。すなわち光の干渉による光の吸収が紫外または赤外の領域にあればよいので、n2・d2≦90、またはn2・d2≧185である。
More specifically, when the phase of the visible light C reflected by the upper surface A and the lower surface B of the
発色空間4が、着色剤としてエレクトロクロミック化合物を含有する場合、エレクトロクロミック化合物は電気的な酸化還元により発色消色が起こるが、その際電荷を補償するため発色空間4に電解液中のイオンが出入りし、それに伴い発色空間の屈折率nが変化し、同時に発色空間の厚さd(nm)も変化する。
When the
本発明において、本発明に係る式(1)及び式(2)で規定する条件を達成するための手段としては、以下の通りである。 In the present invention, means for achieving the conditions defined by the formulas (1) and (2) according to the present invention are as follows.
第1のステップとしては、発色空間を構成するエレクトロクロミック色素の種類及び添加量(発色空間における体積率)、エレクトロクロミック色素の発色空間における存在形態、発色空間を構成するその他の部材、例えば、電解液、顔料、多孔質微粒子を適宜選択すること、あるいは電極を多孔質電極で構成し、そこに吸着させるエレクトロクロミック色素の種類及び添加量(発色空間における体積率)を調整することにより、発色空間のn1、n2を決定する。 As the first step, the type and addition amount of electrochromic dye constituting the color development space (volume ratio in the color development space), the existence form of the electrochromic dye in the color development space, and other members constituting the color development space, such as electrolysis By appropriately selecting the liquid, pigment, and porous fine particles, or by forming the electrode with a porous electrode and adjusting the type and amount of addition (volume ratio in the coloring space) of the electrochromic dye to be adsorbed thereto, the coloring space N 1 and n 2 are determined.
次いで、第2のステップとして、上記により設定した発色空間のn1、n2に従って、式(1)及び式(2)を満たすように、d1、d2を設定する。 Next, as a second step, d 1 and d 2 are set so as to satisfy the expressions (1) and (2) according to the n 1 and n 2 of the coloring space set as described above.
電解質中に金属塩化合物が含有され、発色空間において金属の析出溶解が起こる場合、金属の析出に伴い発色空間の屈折率が変化する。また発色空間の厚さが変化することもある。いずれの場合も表示素子の発色空間の屈折率と厚みを前記したように適切に設定することで本発明の効果を得ることができる。 When the metal salt compound is contained in the electrolyte and the metal is precipitated and dissolved in the coloring space, the refractive index of the coloring space changes with the deposition of the metal. In addition, the thickness of the coloring space may change. In any case, the effects of the present invention can be obtained by appropriately setting the refractive index and thickness of the color development space of the display element as described above.
以下、本発明の表示素子の各構成要素の詳細について説明する。 Hereinafter, details of each component of the display element of the present invention will be described.
〔電解質〕
本発明の表示素子においては、一対の対向する電極間に電解質を含有していることが好ましい。
〔Electrolytes〕
In the display element of the present invention, an electrolyte is preferably contained between a pair of opposed electrodes.
本発明でいう「電解質」とは、一般に、水などの溶媒に溶けて溶液がイオン伝導性を示す物質(以下、「狭義の電解質」という。)をいうが、本発明の説明においては、狭義の電解質に電解質、非電解質を問わず他の金属、化合物等を含有させた混合物を電解質(「広義の電解質」)という。 The “electrolyte” as used in the present invention generally refers to a substance that dissolves in a solvent such as water and exhibits a ionic conductivity in a solution (hereinafter referred to as “narrowly defined electrolyte”). A mixture containing other metals, compounds, or the like, regardless of whether it is an electrolyte or a non-electrolyte, is called an electrolyte (“broadly defined electrolyte”).
(支持電解質)
本発明の表示素子において用いることができる支持電解質としては、電気化学の分野又は電池の分野で通常使用される塩類、酸類、アルカリ類が使用できる。
(Supporting electrolyte)
As the supporting electrolyte that can be used in the display element of the present invention, salts, acids, and alkalis that are usually used in the field of electrochemistry or the field of batteries can be used.
塩類としては、特に制限はなく、例えば、アルカリ金属塩やアルカリ土類金属塩等の無機イオン塩、4級アンモニウム塩、環状4級アンモニウム塩、4級ホスホニウム塩等を使用できる。 The salts are not particularly limited, and for example, inorganic ion salts such as alkali metal salts and alkaline earth metal salts, quaternary ammonium salts, cyclic quaternary ammonium salts, quaternary phosphonium salts and the like can be used.
塩類の具体例としては、ハロゲンイオン、SCN-、ClO4 -、BF4 -、CF3SO3 -、(CF3SO2)2N-、(C2F5SO2)2N-、PF6 -、AsF6 -、CH3COO-、CH3(C6H4)SO3 -、および(C2F5SO2)3C-から選ばれる対アニオンを有するLi塩、Na塩、あるいはK塩が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the salts include halogen ions, SCN − , ClO 4 − , BF 4 − , CF 3 SO 3 − , (CF 3 SO 2 ) 2 N − , (C 2 F 5 SO 2 ) 2 N − , PF Li salt, Na salt having a counter anion selected from 6 − , AsF 6 − , CH 3 COO − , CH 3 (C 6 H 4 ) SO 3 − , and (C 2 F 5 SO 2 ) 3 C − K salt is mentioned.
また、ハロゲンイオン、SCN-、ClO4
-、BF4
-、CF3SO3
-、(CF3SO2)2N-、(C2F5SO2)2N-、PF6
-、AsF6
-、CH3COO-、CH3(C6H4)SO3
-、および(C2F5SO2)3C-から選ばれる対アニオンを有する4級アンモニウム塩、具体的には、(CH3)4NBF4、(C2H5)4NBF4、(n-C4H9)4NBF4、(C2H5)4NBr、(C2H5)4NClO4、(n-C4H9)4NClO4、CH3(C2H5)3NBF4、(CH3)2(C2H5)2NBF4、(CH3)4NSO3CF3、(C2H5)4NSO3CF3、(n-C4H9)4NSO3CF3、
更には
Further, halogen ions, SCN − , ClO 4 − , BF 4 − , CF 3 SO 3 − , (CF 3 SO 2 ) 2 N − , (C 2 F 5 SO 2 ) 2 N − , PF 6 − , AsF 6 -, CH 3 COO -, CH 3 (C 6 H 4) SO 3 -, and (C 2 F 5 SO 2) 3 C - 4 quaternary ammonium salt having a counter anion selected from, specifically, (CH 3 ) 4 NBF 4 , (C 2 H 5 ) 4 NBF 4 , (n-C 4 H 9 ) 4 NBF 4 , (C 2 H 5 ) 4 NBr, (C 2 H 5 ) 4 NClO 4 , (n- C 4 H 9 ) 4 NClO 4 , CH 3 (C 2 H 5 ) 3 NBF 4 , (CH 3 ) 2 (C 2 H 5 ) 2 NBF 4 , (CH 3 ) 4 NSO 3 CF 3 , (C 2 H 5) 4 NSO 3 CF 3, (n-C 4 H 9 4 NSO 3 CF 3,
Furthermore
等が挙げられる。 Etc.
また、ハロゲンイオン、SCN-、ClO4 -、BF4 -、CF3SO3 -、(CF3SO2)2N-、(C2F5SO2)2N-、PF6 -、AsF6 -、CH3COO-、CH3(C6H4)SO3 -、および(C2F5SO2)3C-から選ばれる対アニオンを有するホスホニウム塩、具体的には、(CH3)4PBF4、(C2H5)4PBF4、(C3H7)4PBF4、(C4H9)4PBF4等が挙げられる。また、これらの混合物も好適に用いることができる。 Further, halogen ions, SCN − , ClO 4 − , BF 4 − , CF 3 SO 3 − , (CF 3 SO 2 ) 2 N − , (C 2 F 5 SO 2 ) 2 N − , PF 6 − , AsF 6 -, CH 3 COO -, CH 3 (C 6 H 4) SO 3 -, and (C 2 F 5 SO 2) 3 C - phosphonium salt having a counter anion selected from, specifically, (CH 3) 4 PBF 4 , (C 2 H 5 ) 4 PBF 4 , (C 3 H 7 ) 4 PBF 4 , (C 4 H 9 ) 4 PBF 4 and the like. Moreover, these mixtures can also be used suitably.
支持電解質の使用量は任意であるが、一般的には、支持電解質は溶媒中に上限としては20モル/L以下、好ましくは10モル/L以下、さらに好ましくは5モル/L以下存在していることが望ましく、下限としては通常0.01モル/L以上、好ましくは0.05モル/L以上、さらに好ましくは0.1モル/L以上存在していることである。 The amount of the supporting electrolyte used is arbitrary, but in general, the supporting electrolyte is present in the solvent as an upper limit of 20 mol / L or less, preferably 10 mol / L or less, more preferably 5 mol / L or less. The lower limit is usually 0.01 mol / L or more, preferably 0.05 mol / L or more, more preferably 0.1 mol / L or more.
固体電解質の場合には、電子伝導性やイオン伝導性を示す以下の化合物を、電解質中に含むことができる。 In the case of a solid electrolyte, the following compounds exhibiting electronic conductivity and ionic conductivity can be contained in the electrolyte.
パーフルオロスルホン酸を含むフッ化ビニル系高分子、ポリチオフェン、ポリアニリン、ポリピロール、トリフェニルアミン類、ポリビニルカルバゾール類、ポリメチルフェニルシラン類、Cu2S、Ag2S、Cu2Se、AgCrSe2等のカルコゲニド、CaF2、PbF2、SrF2、LaF3、TlSn2F5、CeF3等の含フッ素化合物、Li2SO4、Li4SiO4、Li3PO4等のLi塩、ZrO2、CaO、Cd2O3、HfO2、Y2O3、Nb2O5、WO3、Bi2O3、AgBr、AgI、CuCl、CuBr、CuBr、CuI、LiI、LiBr、LiCl、LiAlCl4、LiAlF4、AgSBr、C5H5NHAg5I6、Rb4Cu16I7Cl13、Rb3Cu7Cl10、LiN、Li5NI2、Li6NBr3等の化合物が挙げられる。 Vinyl fluoride polymer containing perfluorosulfonic acid, polythiophene, polyaniline, polypyrrole, triphenylamines, polyvinylcarbazoles, polymethylphenylsilanes, Cu 2 S, Ag 2 S, Cu 2 Se, AgCrSe 2, etc. Fluorine-containing compounds such as chalcogenide, CaF 2 , PbF 2 , SrF 2 , LaF 3 , TlSn 2 F 5 , CeF 3 , Li salts such as Li 2 SO 4 , Li 4 SiO 4 , Li 3 PO 4 , ZrO 2 , CaO , Cd 2 O 3 , HfO 2 , Y 2 O 3 , Nb 2 O 5 , WO 3 , Bi 2 O 3 , AgBr, AgI, CuCl, CuBr, CuBr, CuI, LiI, LiBr, LiCl, LiAlCl 4 , LiAlF 4 , AgSBr, C 5 H 5 NHAg 5 I 6 , Rb 4 Cu 16 I Examples thereof include 7 Cl 13 , Rb 3 Cu 7 Cl 10 , LiN, Li 5 NI 2 , and Li 6 NBr 3 .
〔エレクトロクロミック化合物〕
本発明の表示素子においては、一対の対向する電極間に形成する発色空間が、エレクトロクロミック化合物を含有することが好ましい。更には、エレクトロクロミック化合物が、有機色素であることが好ましい。
[Electrochromic compound]
In the display element of the present invention, the color space formed between a pair of opposing electrodes preferably contains an electrochromic compound. Furthermore, the electrochromic compound is preferably an organic dye.
本発明に適用可能なエレクトロクロミック化合物としては、電気化学的な酸化反応及び還元反応により発色又は消色する作用を有する限り、特に制限はなく、目的に応じて適宜選択することができる。このようなエレクトロクロミック化合物としては、例えば、酸化タングステン、酸化イリジウム、酸化ニッケル、酸化コバルト、酸化バナジウム、酸化モリブデン、酸化チタン、酸化インジウム、酸化クロム、酸化マンガン、プルシアンブルー、窒化インジウム、窒化錫、窒化塩化ジルコニウム等の無機化合物に加え、導電性高分子化合物及び有機色素が知られている。 The electrochromic compound applicable to the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it has an action of coloring or decoloring by an electrochemical oxidation reaction and reduction reaction, and can be appropriately selected according to the purpose. Examples of such electrochromic compounds include tungsten oxide, iridium oxide, nickel oxide, cobalt oxide, vanadium oxide, molybdenum oxide, titanium oxide, indium oxide, chromium oxide, manganese oxide, Prussian blue, indium nitride, tin nitride, In addition to inorganic compounds such as zirconium nitride chloride, conductive polymer compounds and organic dyes are known.
また、本発明の表示素子においては、本発明に係るエレクトロクロミック化合物として、電気化学的な酸化反応及び還元反応による溶解、析出により消色及び発色することができる金属を用いることができる。好ましい金属種としては、例えば、銀、ビスマス、銅、ニッケル、鉄、クロム、亜鉛等であり、その中でも、より好ましくは銀、ビスマスである。 In the display element of the present invention, a metal that can be decolored and colored by dissolution and precipitation by an electrochemical oxidation reaction and a reduction reaction can be used as the electrochromic compound according to the present invention. Preferable metal species include, for example, silver, bismuth, copper, nickel, iron, chromium, zinc, etc. Among them, silver and bismuth are more preferable.
エレクトロクロミック特性を示す導電性高分子化合物としては、例えば、ポリピロール、ポリチオフェン、ポリイソチアナフテン、ポリアニリン、ポリフェニレンジアミン、ポリベンジジン、ポリアミノフェノール、ポリビニルカルバゾール、ポリカルバゾール及びこれらの誘導体などが挙げられる。 Examples of the conductive polymer compound exhibiting electrochromic properties include polypyrrole, polythiophene, polyisothianaphthene, polyaniline, polyphenylenediamine, polybenzidine, polyaminophenol, polyvinylcarbazole, polycarbazole, and derivatives thereof.
エレクトロクロミック特性を示す有機色素としては、ビオロゲン等ピリジニウム系化合物、フェノチアジン等アジン系色素、スチリル系色素、アントラキノン系色素、ピラゾリン系色素、フルオラン系色素、ドナー/アクセプター型化合物類(例えば、テトラシアノキノジメタン、テトラチアフルバレン)等が挙げられる。その他、酸化還元指示薬、pH指示薬として知られている化合物を用いることもできる。 Examples of organic dyes exhibiting electrochromic properties include pyridinium compounds such as viologen, azine dyes such as phenothiazine, styryl dyes, anthraquinone dyes, pyrazoline dyes, fluorane dyes, donor / acceptor compounds (for example, tetracyanoquino compounds) Dimethane, tetrathiafulvalene) and the like. In addition, compounds known as redox indicators and pH indicators can also be used.
エレクトロクロミック化合物を、色調変化の点で分類すると、下記3つのクラスに分けられる。 When the electrochromic compounds are classified according to color change, they can be divided into the following three classes.
クラス1:酸化還元により、ある特定の色から別の色に変化するエレクトロクロミック化合物、
クラス2:酸化状態で実質無色であり、還元状態である特定の着色状態を示すエレクトロクロミック化合物、
クラス3:還元状態で実質無色であり、酸化状態である特定の着色状態を示すエレクトロクロミック化合物。
Class 1: An electrochromic compound that changes from one specific color to another by redox,
Class 2: An electrochromic compound that is substantially colorless in an oxidized state and exhibits a specific colored state that is a reduced state;
Class 3: An electrochromic compound that is substantially colorless in the reduced state and exhibits a specific colored state that is an oxidized state.
本発明の表示素子においては、目的や用途により上記クラス1からクラス3のエレクトロクロミック化合物を適宜選択することができる。
In the display element of the present invention, the class 1 to
〔クラス1のエレクトロクロミック化合物〕
クラス1のエレクトロクロミック化合物は、酸化還元により、ある特定の色から別の色に変化するエレクトロクロミック化合物であり、その取り得る酸化状態において、二色以上の表示が可能な化合物である。
[Class 1 electrochromic compound]
A class 1 electrochromic compound is an electrochromic compound that changes from a specific color to another color by oxidation-reduction, and is a compound that can display two or more colors in its possible oxidation state.
クラス1に分類される化合物として、例えば、V2O5は酸化状態から還元状態へ変化することで橙色から緑色に変化し、同様にRu2O3は黄色から暗緑色に変化する。 As a compound classified into class 1, for example, V 2 O 5 changes from orange to green by changing from an oxidation state to a reduction state, and similarly Ru 2 O 3 changes from yellow to dark green.
また、導電性ポリマーもその多くはクラス1に分類される。例えば、ポリチオフェンは酸化状態から還元状態へ変化することで青から赤へと変化し、ポリピロールは褐色から黄色へと変化する。また、ポリアニリン等は、マルチカラー特性を示し、酸化状態の紺色から順に青色、緑色、淡黄色へと変化する。 Many of the conductive polymers are also classified as class 1. For example, polythiophene changes from blue to red by changing from an oxidized state to a reduced state, and polypyrrole changes from brown to yellow. In addition, polyaniline or the like exhibits multi-color characteristics, and changes from an amber color in an oxidation state to blue, green, and light yellow.
クラス1に分類されるエレクトロクロミック化合物は、単一の化合物で、多色表示が可能であるというメリットを有するが、反面、実質無色と言える状態を形成することができないという欠点を有する。 An electrochromic compound classified as class 1 is a single compound and has an advantage of being capable of multicolor display, but has a disadvantage that it cannot form a state that is substantially colorless.
〔クラス2のエレクトロクロミック化合物〕
クラス2のエレクトロクロミック化合物は、酸化状態で無色乃至は極淡色であり、還元状態である特定の着色状態を示す化合物である。
[
クラス2に分類される無機化合物としては、下記化合物が挙げられ、各々還元状態でカッコ内に示した色を示す。WO3(青)、MnO3(青)、Nb2O5(青)、TiO2(青)等。
Examples of the inorganic compounds classified as
クラス2に分類される有機色素としては、特開昭62-71934号公報、特開2006-71765号公報等に記載されている化合物、例えば、テレフタル酸ジメチル(赤)、4,4′-ビフェニルカルボン酸ジエチル(黄色)、1,4-ジアセチルベンゼン(シアン)、或いは特開平1-230026号公報、特表2000-504764号公報等に記載されているテトラゾリウム塩化合物等が挙げられる。
Examples of organic dyes classified as
クラス2に分類される色素として、最も代表的なのはビオロゲン等のピリジニウム系化合物である。ビオロゲン系化合物は表示画像が鮮明であること、置換基を変えることにより、色のバリエーションを持たせることが可能であることなどの長所を有しているため、有機色素の中では最も盛んに研究されている。発色は、還元で生じた有機ラジカルに基づくものである。
The most representative dyes classified in
ビオロゲン等のピリジニウム系化合物としては、例えば、特表2000-506629号公報を初めとして下記の各特許文献に記載されている化合物が挙げられる。 Examples of pyridinium compounds such as viologen include compounds described in each of the following patent documents starting with JP-T-2000-506629.
特開平5-70455号公報、特開平5-170738号公報、特開2000-235198号公報、特開2001-114769号公報、特開2001-172293号公報、特開2001-181292号公報、特開2001-181293号公報、特表2001-510590号公報、特開2004-101729号公報、特開2006-154683号公報、特表2006-519222号公報、特開2007-31708号公報、特開2007-171781号公報、特開2007-219271号公報、特開2007-219272号公報、特開2007-279659号公報、特開2007-279570号公報、特開2007-279571号公報、特開2007-279572号公報等。 JP-A-5-70455, JP-A-5-170738, JP-A-2000-235198, JP-A-2001-114769, JP-A-2001-172293, JP-A-2001-181292, JP-A-2001-181292 JP 2001-181293, JP 2001-510590, JP 2004-101729, JP 2006-154683, JP 2006-519222, JP 2007-31708, JP 2007-. No. 171781, No. 2007-219271, No. 2007-219272, No. 2007-279659, No. 2007-279570, No. 2007-279571, No. 2007-279572. Gazette etc.
以下に、本発明に用いることができるビオロゲン等のピリジニウム化合物を例示するが、これらに限定されるものでは無い。 Examples of pyridinium compounds such as viologen that can be used in the present invention are shown below, but are not limited thereto.
〔クラス3のエレクトロクロミック化合物〕
クラス3のエレクトロクロミック化合物は、還元状態で無色あるいは極淡色であり、酸化状態で特定の着色状態を示す化合物である。
[
クラス3に分類される無機化合物としては、例えば、酸化イリジウム(暗青色)、プルシアンブルー(青)等が挙げられる(各々酸化状態でカッコ内に示した色を呈する)。
Examples of inorganic compounds classified as
クラス3に分類される導電性ポリマーとしては、例は少ないが、例えば、特開平6-263846号公報に記載のフェニルエーテル系化合物が挙げられる。
There are few examples of conductive polymers classified into
クラス3に分類される色素としては、多数の色素が知られているが、スチリル系色素、フェナジン、フェノチアジン、フェノキサジン、アクリジン等のアジン系色素、イミダゾール、オキサゾール、チアゾール等のアゾール系色素等が好ましい。
Many dyes are known as
以下に、本発明に用いることのできるスチリル系色素、及びアジン系色素、アゾール系色素を例示するが、これらに限定されるものではない。 Hereinafter, styryl dyes, azine dyes, and azole dyes that can be used in the present invention are exemplified, but the invention is not limited thereto.
本発明の好ましい態様においては、前記エレクトロクロミック色素と共に電気化学的な酸化還元反応により可逆的に溶解析出する金属塩を併用し、黒表示、白表示及び黒以外の着色表示の3色以上の多色表示を行う。この場合、該金属塩が還元されて黒表示を行う為、エレクトロクロミック色素としては酸化により発色するクラス3のエレクトロクロミック化合物が好ましい。
In a preferred embodiment of the present invention, a metal salt that reversibly dissolves and precipitates by an electrochemical redox reaction is used in combination with the electrochromic dye, and a plurality of three or more colors of black display, white display, and color display other than black are used. Perform color display. In this case, since the metal salt is reduced to display black, the electrochromic dye is preferably a
特に、本発明においては、屈折率の観点から、エレクトロクロミック化合物として、本発明に係る下記一般式(L)で表されるエレクトロクロミック化合物が好ましい。 In particular, in the present invention, from the viewpoint of refractive index, an electrochromic compound represented by the following general formula (L) according to the present invention is preferable as the electrochromic compound.
以下、本発明に係る上記一般式(L)で表されるエレクトロクロミック化合物について説明する。 Hereinafter, the electrochromic compound represented by the general formula (L) according to the present invention will be described.
上記一般式(L)において、Rl1は置換もしくは無置換のアリール基を表し、Rl2、Rl3は各々水素原子または置換基を表す。Xは>N-Rl4、酸素原子または硫黄原子を表し、Rl4は水素原子または置換基を表す。 In the general formula (L), Rl 1 represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, and Rl 2 and Rl 3 each represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent. X represents> N—Rl 4 , an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and Rl 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
Rl1が置換基を有するアリール基を表す場合、置換基としては特に制限は無く、例えば、以下のような置換基が挙げられる。 When Rl 1 represents an aryl group having a substituent, the substituent is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include the following substituents.
アルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、tert-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基等)、シクロアルキル基(例えば、シクロヘキシル基、シクロペンチル基等)、アルケニル基、シクロアルケニル基、アルキニル基(例えば、プロパルギル基等)、グリシジル基、アクリレート基、メタクリレート基、芳香族基(例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基、アントラセニル基等)、複素環基(例えば、ピリジル基、チアゾリル基、オキサゾリル基、イミダゾリル基、フリル基、ピロリル基、ピラジニル基、ピリミジニル基、ピリダジニル基、セレナゾリル基、スリホラニル基、ピペリジニル基、ピラゾリル基、テトラゾリル基等)、アルコキシ基(例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロピルオキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、シクロペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、シクロヘキシルオキシ基等)、アリールオキシ基(例えば、フェノキシ基等)、アルコキシカルボニル基(例えば、メチルオキシカルボニル基、エチルオキシカルボニル基、ブチルオキシカルボニル基等)、アリールオキシカルボニル基(例えば、フェニルオキシカルボニル基等)、スルホンアミド基(例えば、メタンスルホンアミド基、エタンスルホンアミド基、ブタンスルホンアミド基、ヘキサンスルホンアミド基、シクロヘキサンスルホンアミド基、ベンゼンスルホンアミド基等)、スルファモイル基(例えば、アミノスルホニル基、メチルアミノスルホニル基、ジメチルアミノスルホニル基、ブチルアミノスルホニル基、ヘキシルアミノスルホニル基、シクロヘキシルアミノスルホニル基、フェニルアミノスルホニル基、2-ピリジルアミノスルホニル基等)、ウレタン基(例えば、メチルウレイド基、エチルウレイド基、ペンチルウレイド基、シクロヘキシルウレイド基、フェニルウレイド基、2-ピリジルウレイド基等)、アシル基(例えば、アセチル基、プロピオニル基、ブタノイル基、ヘキサノイル基、シクロヘキサノイル基、ベンゾイル基、ピリジノイル基等)、カルバモイル基(例えば、アミノカルボニル基、メチルアミノカルボニル基、ジメチルアミノカルボニル基、プロピルアミノカルボニル基、ペンチルアミノカルボニル基、シクロヘキシルアミノカルボニル基、フェニルアミノカルボニル基、2-ピリジルアミノカルボニル基等)、アシルアミノ基(例えば、アセチルアミノ基、ベンゾイルアミノ基、メチルウレイド基等)、スルホニル基(例えば、メチルスルホニル基、エチルスルホニル基、ブチルスルホニル基、シクロヘキシルスルホニル基、フェニルスルホニル基、2-ピリジルスルホニル基等)、アミノ基(例えば、アミノ基、エチルアミノ基、ジメチルアミノ基、ブチルアミノ基、シクロペンチルアミノ基、アニリノ基、2-ピリジルアミノ基等)、ハロゲン原子(例えば、塩素原子、臭素原子、沃素原子等)、シアノ基、ニトロ基、スルホ基、カルボキシル基、ヒドロキシル基、ホスホノ基(例えば、ホスホノエチル基、ホスホノプロピル基、ホスホノオキシエチル基)等を挙げることができる。また、これらの基はさらにこれらの基で置換されていてもよい。 Alkyl groups (eg, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, etc.), cycloalkyl groups (eg, cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl, etc.), alkenyl, cycloalkenyl , Alkynyl groups (eg, propargyl group, etc.), glycidyl groups, acrylate groups, methacrylate groups, aromatic groups (eg, phenyl group, naphthyl group, anthracenyl group, etc.), heterocyclic groups (eg, pyridyl group, thiazolyl group, oxazolyl group) Group, imidazolyl group, furyl group, pyrrolyl group, pyrazinyl group, pyrimidinyl group, pyridazinyl group, selenazolyl group, sriphoranyl group, piperidinyl group, pyrazolyl group, tetrazolyl group, etc.), alkoxy group (for example, methoxy group, ethoxy group, propyloxy) Group, pen Ruoxy group, cyclopentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, cyclohexyloxy group, etc.), aryloxy group (eg, phenoxy group, etc.), alkoxycarbonyl group (eg, methyloxycarbonyl group, ethyloxycarbonyl group, butyloxycarbonyl group, etc.) , Aryloxycarbonyl group (for example, phenyloxycarbonyl group), sulfonamide group (for example, methanesulfonamide group, ethanesulfonamide group, butanesulfonamide group, hexanesulfonamide group, cyclohexanesulfonamide group, benzenesulfonamide group ), Sulfamoyl group (for example, aminosulfonyl group, methylaminosulfonyl group, dimethylaminosulfonyl group, butylaminosulfonyl group, hexylaminosulfonyl group, cyclohexyla) Nosulfonyl group, phenylaminosulfonyl group, 2-pyridylaminosulfonyl group, etc.), urethane group (for example, methylureido group, ethylureido group, pentylureido group, cyclohexylureido group, phenylureido group, 2-pyridylureido group, etc.), Acyl group (for example, acetyl group, propionyl group, butanoyl group, hexanoyl group, cyclohexanoyl group, benzoyl group, pyridinoyl group, etc.), carbamoyl group (for example, aminocarbonyl group, methylaminocarbonyl group, dimethylaminocarbonyl group, propyl) Aminocarbonyl group, pentylaminocarbonyl group, cyclohexylaminocarbonyl group, phenylaminocarbonyl group, 2-pyridylaminocarbonyl group, etc.), acylamino group (eg acetylamino group, benzoyl group) Amino group, methylureido group, etc.), sulfonyl group (eg, methylsulfonyl group, ethylsulfonyl group, butylsulfonyl group, cyclohexylsulfonyl group, phenylsulfonyl group, 2-pyridylsulfonyl group, etc.), amino group (eg, amino group, Ethylamino group, dimethylamino group, butylamino group, cyclopentylamino group, anilino group, 2-pyridylamino group, etc.), halogen atom (eg chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom etc.), cyano group, nitro group, sulfo group Carboxyl group, hydroxyl group, phosphono group (for example, phosphonoethyl group, phosphonopropyl group, phosphonooxyethyl group) and the like. Further, these groups may be further substituted with these groups.
Rl1としては、置換もしくは無置換のフェニル基が好ましく、更に好ましくは置換もしくは無置換の2-ヒドロキシフェニル基または4-ヒドロキシフェニル基である。 Rl 1 is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group, more preferably a substituted or unsubstituted 2-hydroxyphenyl group or 4-hydroxyphenyl group.
R12、Rl3で表される置換基としては特に制限は無く、前記Rl1のアリール基上への置換基として例示した置換基等が挙げられる。好ましくはRl2、Rl3はそれぞれ、置換基を有しても良い、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、芳香族基、複素環基である。Rl2、Rl3は互いに連結して、環構造を形成しても良い。Rl2、Rl3の組み合わせとしては、双方共に置換基を有しても良いフェニル基、複素環基である場合、若しくは何れか一方が置換基を有しても良いフェニル基、複素環基であり、他方が置換基を有しても良いアルキル基の組み合わせである。 The substituent represented by R1 2 or Rl 3 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include the substituents exemplified as the substituent on the aryl group of Rl 1 . Preferably, Rl 2 and Rl 3 are each an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aromatic group, or a heterocyclic group, which may have a substituent. Rl 2 and Rl 3 may be connected to each other to form a ring structure. As a combination of Rl 2 and Rl 3 , both of them may be a phenyl group or a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent, or one of them may be a phenyl group or a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent. Yes, the other is a combination of alkyl groups which may have a substituent.
Xとして好ましくは、>N-Rl4である。Rl4として好ましくは、水素原子、アルキル基、芳香族基、複素環基またはアシル基であり、より好ましくは水素原子、炭素数1~10のアルキル基、炭素数5~10のアリール基、アシル基である。 The preferred X, is> N-Rl 4. Rl 4 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aromatic group, a heterocyclic group or an acyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 5 to 10 carbon atoms, an acyl group It is a group.
本発明の表示素子においては、本発明に係る一般式(L)で表される化合物が、電極表面と化学吸着または物理吸着する基を有していることが好ましい。本発明でいう化学吸着とは、電極表面との化学結合による比較的強い吸着状態であり、本発明でいう物理吸着とは、電極表面と吸着物質との間に働くファンデルワールス力による比較的弱い吸着状態である。本発明に係る吸着性基は、化学吸着性の基である方が好ましく、化学吸着する吸着性基としては、-COOH、-P=O(OH)2、-OP=O(OH)2、または-Si(OR)3(Rは、アルキル基を表す)が好ましい。 In the display element of the present invention, it is preferable that the compound represented by the general formula (L) according to the present invention has a group that chemically or physically adsorbs on the electrode surface. The chemical adsorption referred to in the present invention is a relatively strong adsorption state due to a chemical bond with the electrode surface, and the physical adsorption referred to in the present invention is a relatively strong van der Waals force acting between the electrode surface and the adsorbed substance. It is weakly adsorbed. The adsorptive group according to the present invention is preferably a chemisorbable group. Examples of the adsorptive group to be chemisorbed include —COOH, —P═O (OH) 2 , —OP═O (OH) 2 , Or -Si (OR) 3 (R represents an alkyl group) is preferable.
一般式(L)で表されるアゾール色素の中でも、特に、下記一般式(L2)で表されるイミダゾール系色素が好ましい。 Among the azole dyes represented by the general formula (L), an imidazole dye represented by the following general formula (L2) is particularly preferable.
上記一般式(L2)において、Rl21、Rl22は各々脂肪族基、脂肪族オキシ基、アシルアミノ基、カルバモイル基、アシル基、スルホンアミド基、またはスルファモイル基を表し、Rl23は芳香族基または芳香族複素環基を表し、Rl24は水素原子、脂肪族基、芳香族基、または芳香族複素環基を表し、Rl25は水素原子、脂肪族基、芳香族基、またはアシル基を表す。 In the general formula (L2), Rl 21 and Rl 22 each represents an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, an acylamino group, a carbamoyl group, an acyl group, a sulfonamido group, or a sulfamoyl group, and Rl 23 represents an aromatic group or Represents an aromatic heterocyclic group, Rl 24 represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, or an aromatic heterocyclic group, and Rl 25 represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, or an acyl group. .
これらRl21~Rl25で表される基は、更に任意の置換基で置換されていても良い。但し、Rl21~Rl25で表される基の少なくとも1つは、その部分構造として-COOH、-P=O(OH)2、-OP=O(OH)2、または-Si(OR)3(Rは、アルキル基を表す)を有する。 These groups represented by Rl 21 to Rl 25 may be further substituted with an arbitrary substituent. However, at least one of the groups represented by Rl 21 to Rl 25 has a partial structure of —COOH, —P═O (OH) 2 , —OP═O (OH) 2 , or —Si (OR) 3. (R represents an alkyl group).
一般式(L2)において、Rl21、Rl22で表される基としては、アルキル基(特に分岐アルキル基)、シクロアルキル基、アルキルオキシ基、シクロアルキルオキシ基が好ましい。Rl23としては置換若しくは無置換のフェニル基、5員もしくは6員環複素環基(例えば、チエニル基、フリル基、ピロリル基、ピリジル基等)が好ましい。Rl24としては置換若しくは無置換の、フェニル基、5員もしくは6員環複素環基、アルキル基が好ましい。Rl25としては特に水素原子若しくはアリール基が好ましい。 In the general formula (L2), the group represented by Rl 21 or Rl 22 is preferably an alkyl group (particularly a branched alkyl group), a cycloalkyl group, an alkyloxy group, or a cycloalkyloxy group. Rl 23 is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group, a 5-membered or 6-membered heterocyclic group (for example, thienyl group, furyl group, pyrrolyl group, pyridyl group, etc.). Rl 24 is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group, a 5-membered or 6-membered heterocyclic group, or an alkyl group. Rl 25 is particularly preferably a hydrogen atom or an aryl group.
また、一般式(L2)で表される化合物を電極上に固定する際、これらRl21からRl25で示される基の少なくともひとつに、部分構造として、-P=O(OH)2、-Si(OR)3(Rは、アルキル基を表す)を有することが好ましく、特に、Rl23またはRl24で示される基の部分構造として-Si(OR)3(Rは、アルキル基を表す)を有することが好ましい。 Further, when the compound represented by the general formula (L2) is fixed on the electrode, at least one of the groups represented by Rl 21 to Rl 25 has a partial structure of —P═O (OH) 2 , —Si It is preferable to have (OR) 3 (R represents an alkyl group), and in particular, —Si (OR) 3 (R represents an alkyl group) as a partial structure of the group represented by Rl 23 or Rl 24 It is preferable to have.
以下に、一般式(L2)で表されるエレクトロクロミック色素の具体的化合物例、及び一般式(L2)には該当しないが、一般式(L)に含まれるエレクトロクロミック色素の具体例を示すが、本発明はこれら例示する化合物にのみ限定されるものではない。 Specific examples of the electrochromic dye represented by the general formula (L2) and specific examples of the electrochromic dye contained in the general formula (L) are shown below, although they do not correspond to the general formula (L2). The present invention is not limited only to these exemplified compounds.
〔金属塩化合物〕
本発明に係る金属塩化合物とは、対向電極上の少なくとも1方の電極上で、該対向電極の駆動操作で、溶解・析出を行うことができる金属種を含む塩であれば、如何なる化合物であってもよい。好ましい金属種は、銀、ビスマス、銅、ニッケル、鉄、クロム、亜鉛等であり、特に好ましいのは銀、ビスマスである。
[Metal salt compounds]
The metal salt compound according to the present invention is any compound as long as it contains a metal species that can be dissolved and precipitated by driving the counter electrode on at least one electrode on the counter electrode. There may be. Preferred metal species are silver, bismuth, copper, nickel, iron, chromium, zinc and the like, and particularly preferred are silver and bismuth.
〔銀塩化合物〕
本発明に係る銀塩化合物とは、銀または、銀を化学構造中に含む化合物、例えば、酸化銀、硫化銀、金属銀、銀コロイド粒子、ハロゲン化銀、銀錯体化合物、銀イオン等の化合物の総称であり、固体状態や液体への可溶化状態や気体状態等の相の状態種、中性、アニオン性、カチオン性等の荷電状態種は、特に問わない。
[Silver salt compound]
The silver salt compound according to the present invention is silver or a compound containing silver in the chemical structure, such as silver oxide, silver sulfide, metallic silver, silver colloidal particles, silver halide, silver complex compound, silver ion and the like. There are no particular restrictions on the phase state species such as the solid state, the solubilized state in liquid, and the gas state, and the charged state species such as neutral, anionic, and cationic.
本発明の表示素子においては、ヨウ化銀、塩化銀、臭化銀、酸化銀、硫化銀、クエン酸銀、酢酸銀、ベヘン酸銀、p-トルエンスルホン酸銀、トリフルオロメタンスルホン酸銀、メルカプト類との銀塩、イミノジ酢酸類との銀錯体、等の公知の銀塩化合物を用いることができる。これらの中で、ハロゲンやカルボン酸や銀との配位性を有する窒素原子を有しない化合物を銀塩として用いるのが好ましく、例えば、p-トルエンスルホン酸銀が好ましい。 In the display element of the present invention, silver iodide, silver chloride, silver bromide, silver oxide, silver sulfide, silver citrate, silver acetate, silver behenate, silver p-toluenesulfonate, silver trifluoromethanesulfonate, mercapto A known silver salt compound such as a silver salt with an acid or a silver complex with iminodiacetic acid can be used. Among these, it is preferable to use, as the silver salt, a compound which does not have a nitrogen atom having a coordination property with halogen, carboxylic acid or silver, and for example, silver p-toluenesulfonate is preferable.
本発明に係る電解質液に含まれる金属イオン濃度は、0.2モル/kg≦[Metal]≦2.0モル/kgが好ましい。金属イオン濃度が0.2モル/kg以上であれば、十分な濃度の銀溶液となり所望の駆動速度を得ることができ、2モル/kg以下であれば析出を防止し、低温保存時での電解質液の安定性が向上する。 The metal ion concentration contained in the electrolyte solution according to the present invention is preferably 0.2 mol / kg ≦ [Metal] ≦ 2.0 mol / kg. If the metal ion concentration is 0.2 mol / kg or more, a silver solution having a sufficient concentration can be obtained, and a desired driving speed can be obtained. If the metal ion concentration is 2 mol / kg or less, precipitation is prevented, and storage at low temperature is possible. The stability of the electrolyte solution is improved.
〔銀塩溶剤〕
本発明においては、金属塩(特に銀塩)の溶解析出を促進するために、銀塩溶剤を用いることができる。銀塩溶剤とは、電解質中で銀を可溶化できる化合物であればいかなる化合物であってもよい。例えば、銀と配位結合を生じさせたり、銀と弱い供給結合を生じさせたりするような、銀と相互作用を示す化学構造種を含む化合物等と共存させて、銀または銀を含む化合物を可溶化物に変換する手段を用いるのが一般的である。前記化学種として、ハロゲン原子、メルカプト基、カルボキシル基、イミノ基等が知られているが、本発明においては、チオエーテル基を含有する化合物及びメルカプトアゾール類は、銀溶剤として有用に作用しかつ、共存化合物への影響が少なく溶媒への溶解度が高い特徴がある。
[Silver salt solvent]
In the present invention, a silver salt solvent can be used to promote dissolution and precipitation of metal salts (particularly silver salts). The silver salt solvent may be any compound that can solubilize silver in the electrolyte. For example, silver or a compound containing silver coexisting with a compound containing a chemical structural species that interacts with silver, such as a coordinate bond with silver or a weak supply bond with silver. It is common to use a means for converting to a solubilizate. As the chemical species, a halogen atom, a mercapto group, a carboxyl group, an imino group, and the like are known. It is characterized by low influence on coexisting compounds and high solubility in solvents.
本発明の表示素子においては、電解質が、銀塩溶剤として前記一般式(G-1)または(G-2)で表される化合物を含有することが好ましい。 In the display element of the present invention, the electrolyte preferably contains a compound represented by the general formula (G-1) or (G-2) as a silver salt solvent.
〈一般式(G-1)または(G-2)で表される化合物〉
本発明に係る前記一般式(G-1)で表されるチオエーテル化合物及び前記一般式(G-2)で表されるメルカプト化合物は、銀の溶解析出を生じさせるため、電解質中での銀の可溶化を促進する化合物である。
<Compound represented by formula (G-1) or (G-2)>
The thioether compound represented by the general formula (G-1) and the mercapto compound represented by the general formula (G-2) according to the present invention cause dissolution and precipitation of silver. It is a compound that promotes solubilization.
一般に、銀の溶解析出を生じさせるためには、電解質中で銀を可溶化することが必要であり、例えば、銀と配位結合を生じ、銀と弱い共有結合を生じさせるような、銀と相互作用を示す化学構造種を含む化合物が有用である。前記化学構造種として、ハロゲン原子、メルカプト基、カルボキシル基、イミノ基等が知られているが、本発明においては、チオエーテル基を含有する化合物及びメルカプトアゾール類は、銀溶剤として有用に作用し、かつ共存化合物への影響が少なく溶媒への溶解度が高い特徴がある。 In general, in order to cause dissolution and precipitation of silver, it is necessary to solubilize silver in an electrolyte. For example, silver that causes a coordinate bond with silver and a weak covalent bond with silver can be obtained. Compounds containing chemical structural species that exhibit interaction are useful. As the chemical structural species, a halogen atom, a mercapto group, a carboxyl group, an imino group, and the like are known, but in the present invention, a compound containing a thioether group and mercaptoazoles usefully function as a silver solvent, In addition, there is a feature that the influence on the coexisting compound is small and the solubility in the solvent is high.
前記一般式(G-1)において、Rg11、Rg12は各々置換または無置換の炭化水素基を表す。また、これらの炭化水素基では、1個以上の窒素原子、酸素原子、リン原子、硫黄原子、ハロゲン原子を含んでも良く、Rg11とRg12が互いに連結し、環状構造を取っても良い。 In the general formula (G-1), Rg 11 and Rg 12 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted hydrocarbon group. These hydrocarbon groups may contain one or more nitrogen atoms, oxygen atoms, phosphorus atoms, sulfur atoms, and halogen atoms, and Rg 11 and Rg 12 may be linked to each other to form a cyclic structure.
前記一般式(G-2)において、Mは水素原子、金属原子または4級アンモニウムを表す。Zは含窒素複素環を構成するのに必要な原子群表す。nは0~5の整数を表し、Rg21は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、アルキルカルボンアミド基、アリールカルボンアミド基、アルキルスルホンアミド基、アリールスルホンアミド基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、アルキルカルバモイル基、アリールカルバモイル基、カルバモイル基、アルキルスルファモイル基、アリールスルファモイル基、スルファモイル基、シアノ基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、アルキルカルボニル基、アリールカルボニル基、アシルオキシ基、カルボキシル基、カルボニル基、スルホニル基、アミノ基、ヒドロキシ基または複素環基を表し、nが2以上の場合、それぞれのRg21は同じであってもよく、異なってもよく、お互いに連結して縮合環を形成してもよい。 In the general formula (G-2), M represents a hydrogen atom, a metal atom, or quaternary ammonium. Z represents an atomic group necessary for constituting a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring. n represents an integer of 0 to 5, and Rg 21 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkylcarbonamide group, an arylcarbonamide group, an alkylsulfonamide group, an arylsulfonamide group, an alkoxy group, an aryl Oxy group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, alkylcarbamoyl group, arylcarbamoyl group, carbamoyl group, alkylsulfamoyl group, arylsulfamoyl group, sulfamoyl group, cyano group, alkylsulfonyl group, arylsulfonyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group, Represents an aryloxycarbonyl group, an alkylcarbonyl group, an arylcarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carboxyl group, a carbonyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a hydroxy group or a heterocyclic group, and when n is 2 or more, Of Rg 21 may be the same or different, and may be linked to each other to form a condensed ring.
前記一般式(G-1)において、Rg11、Rg12は各々置換または無置換の炭化水素基を表すが、これらの炭化水素基では、1個以上の窒素原子、酸素原子、リン原子、硫黄原子を含んでも良く、Rg11とRg12が互いに連結し、環状構造を取っても良い。 In the general formula (G-1), Rg 11 and Rg 12 each represent a substituted or unsubstituted hydrocarbon group, and in these hydrocarbon groups, one or more nitrogen atoms, oxygen atoms, phosphorus atoms, sulfur An atom may be included, and Rg 11 and Rg 12 may be connected to each other to take a cyclic structure.
炭化水素基に置換可能な基としては、例えば、アミノ基、グアニジノ基、4級アンモニウム基、ヒドロキシル基、ハロゲン化合物、カルボン酸基、カルボキシレート基、アミド基、スルフィン酸基、スルホン酸基、スルフェート基、ホスホン酸基、ホスフェート基、ニトロ基、シアノ基等を挙げることができる。 Examples of groups that can be substituted for the hydrocarbon group include amino groups, guanidino groups, quaternary ammonium groups, hydroxyl groups, halogen compounds, carboxylic acid groups, carboxylate groups, amide groups, sulfinic acid groups, sulfonic acid groups, and sulfates. Groups, phosphonic acid groups, phosphate groups, nitro groups, cyano groups and the like.
以下、本発明において適用可能な一般式(G-1)で表される化合物の具体例を示すが、本発明ではこれら例示する化合物にのみ限定されるものではない。 Hereinafter, specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (G-1) applicable in the present invention will be shown, but the present invention is not limited to these exemplified compounds.
G1-1:CH3SCH2CH2OH
G1-2:HOCH2CH2SCH2CH2OH
G1-3:HOCH2CH2SCH2CH2SCH2CH2OH
G1-4:HOCH2CH2SCH2CH2SCH2CH2SCH2CH2OH
G1-5:HOCH2CH2SCH2CH2OCH2CH2OCH2CH2SCH2CH2OH
G1-6:HOCH2CH2OCH2CH2SCH2CH2SCH2CH2OCH2CH2OH
G1-7:H3CSCH2CH2COOH
G1-8:HOOCCH2SCH2COOH
G1-9:HOOCCH2CH2SCH2CH2COOH
G1-10:HOOCCH2SCH2CH2SCH2COOH
G1-11:HOOCCH2SCH2CH2SCH2CH2SCH2CH2SCH2COOH
G1-12:HOOCCH2CH2SCH2CH2SCH2CH(OH)CH2SCH2CH2SCH2CH2COOH
G1-13:HOOCCH2CH2SCH2CH2SCH2CH(OH)CH(OH)CH2SCH2CH2SCH2CH2COOH
G1-14:H3CSCH2CH2CH2NH2
G1-15:H2NCH2CH2SCH2CH2NH2
G1-16:H2NCH2CH2SCH2CH2SCH2CH2NH2
G1-17:H3CSCH2CH2CH(NH2)COOH
G1-18:H2NCH2CH2OCH2CH2SCH2CH2SCH2CH2OCH2CH2NH2
G1-19:H2NCH2CH2SCH2CH2OCH2CH2OCH2CH2SCH2CH2NH2
G1-20:H2NCH2CH2SCH2CH2SCH2CH2SCH2CH2SCH2CH2NH2
G1-21:HOOC(NH2)CHCH2CH2SCH2CH2SCH2CH2CH(NH2)COOH
G1-22:HOOC(NH2)CHCH2SCH2CH2OCH2CH2OCH2CH2SCH2CH(NH2)COOH
G1-23:HOOC(NH2)CHCH2OCH2CH2SCH2CH2SCH2CH2OCH2CH(NH2)COOH
G1-24:H2N(O=)CCH2SCH2CH2OCH2CH2OCH2CH2SCH2C(=O)NH2
G1-25:H2N(O=)CCH2SCH2CH2SCH2C(=O)NH2
G1-26:H2NHN(O=)CCH2SCH2CH2SCH2C(=O)NHNH2
G1-27:H3C(O=)CNHCH2CH2SCH2CH2SCH2CH2NHC(=O)CH3
G1-28:H2NO2SCH2CH2SCH2CH2SCH2CH2SO2NH2
G1-29:NaO3SCH2CH2CH2SCH2CH2SCH2CH2CH2SO3Na
G1-30:H3CSO2NHCH2CH2SCH2CH2SCH2CH2NHO2SCH3
G1-31:H2N(NH)CSCH2CH2SC(NH)NH2・2HBr
G1-32:H2N(NH)CSCH2CH2OCH2CH2OCH2CH2SC(NH)NH2・2HCl
G1-33:H2N(NH)CNHCH2CH2SCH2CH2SCH2CH2NHC(NH)NH2・2HBr
G1-34:〔(CH3)3NCH2CH2SCH2CH2SCH2CH2N(CH3)3〕2+・2Cl-
G1-1: CH 3 SCH 2 CH 2 OH
G1-2: HOCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 OH
G1-3: HOCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 OH
G1-4: HOCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 OH
G1-5: HOCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 OH
G1-6: HOCH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 OH
G1-7: H 3 CSCH 2 CH 2 COOH
G1-8: HOOCCH 2 SCH 2 COOH
G1-9: HOOCCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 COOH
G1-10: HOOCCH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 COOH
G1-11: HOOCCH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 COOH
G1-12: HOOCCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH (OH) CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 COOH
G1-13: HOOCCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH (OH) CH (OH) CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 COOH
G1-14: H 3 CSCH 2 CH 2 CH 2 NH 2
G1-15: H 2 NCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 NH 2
G1-16: H 2 NCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 NH 2
G1-17: H 3 CSCH 2 CH 2 CH (NH 2 ) COOH
G1-18: H 2 NCH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 NH 2
G1-19: H 2 NCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 NH 2
G1-20: H 2 NCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 NH 2
G1-21: HOOC (NH 2 ) CHCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 CH (NH 2 ) COOH
G1-22: HOOC (NH 2 ) CHCH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH (NH 2 ) COOH
G1-23: HOOC (NH 2 ) CHCH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH (NH 2 ) COOH
G1-24: H 2 N (O═) CCH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 C (═O) NH 2
G1-25: H 2 N (O═) CCH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 C (═O) NH 2
G1-26: H 2 NHN (O═) CCH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 C (═O) NHNH 2
G1-27: H 3 C (O═) CNHCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 NHC (═O) CH 3
G1-28: H 2 NO 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SO 2 NH 2
G1-29: NaO 3 SCH 2 CH 2
G1-30: H 3 CSO 2 NHCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 NHO 2 SCH 3
G1-31: H 2 N (NH) CSCH 2 CH 2 SC (NH) NH 2 .2HBr
G1-32: H 2 N (NH) CSCH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 SC (NH) NH 2 .2HCl
G1-33: H 2 N (NH) CNHCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 NHC (NH) NH 2 .2HBr
G1-34: [(CH 3 ) 3 NCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 N (CH 3 ) 3 ] 2 + · 2Cl −
上記例示した各化合物の中でも、本発明の目的効果をいかんなく発揮できる観点から、特に、例示化合物G1-2、G1-3が好ましい。 Among the above-exemplified compounds, Exemplified Compounds G1-2 and G1-3 are particularly preferable from the viewpoint that the object and effects of the present invention can be exhibited.
次いで、本発明に係る一般式(G-2)で表される化合物について説明する。 Next, the compound represented by formula (G-2) according to the present invention will be described.
前記一般式(G-2)において、Mは水素原子、金属原子または4級アンモニウムを表す。Zは含窒素複素環を構成するのに必要な原子群表す。nは0~5の整数を表し、Rg21は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、アルキルカルボンアミド基、アリールカルボンアミド基、アルキルスルホンアミド基、アリールスルホンアミド基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、アルキルカルバモイル基、アリールカルバモイル基、カルバモイル基、アルキルスルファモイル基、アリールスルファモイル基、スルファモイル基、シアノ基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、アルキルカルボニル基、アリールカルボニル基、アシルオキシ基、カルボキシル基、カルボニル基、スルホニル基、アミノ基、ヒドロキシ基または複素環基を表し、nが2以上の場合、それぞれのRg21は同じであってもよく、異なってもよく、お互いに連結して縮合環を形成してもよい。 In the general formula (G-2), M represents a hydrogen atom, a metal atom, or quaternary ammonium. Z represents an atomic group necessary for constituting a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring. n represents an integer of 0 to 5, and Rg 21 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkylcarbonamide group, an arylcarbonamide group, an alkylsulfonamide group, an arylsulfonamide group, an alkoxy group, an aryl Oxy group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, alkylcarbamoyl group, arylcarbamoyl group, carbamoyl group, alkylsulfamoyl group, arylsulfamoyl group, sulfamoyl group, cyano group, alkylsulfonyl group, arylsulfonyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group, Represents an aryloxycarbonyl group, an alkylcarbonyl group, an arylcarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carboxyl group, a carbonyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a hydroxy group or a heterocyclic group, and when n is 2 or more, Of Rg 21 may be the same or different, and may be linked to each other to form a condensed ring.
一般式(G-2)において、Mで表される金属原子としては、例えば、Li、Na、K、Mg、Ca、Zn、Ag等が挙げられ、4級アンモニウムとしては、例えば、NH4、N(CH3)4、N(C4H9)4、N(CH3)3C12H25、N(CH3)3C16H33、N(CH3)3CH2C6H5等が挙げられる。 In the general formula (G-2), examples of the metal atom represented by M include Li, Na, K, Mg, Ca, Zn, Ag, and the like. Examples of the quaternary ammonium include NH 4 , N (CH 3 ) 4 , N (C 4 H 9 ) 4 , N (CH 3 ) 3 C 12 H 25 , N (CH 3 ) 3 C 16 H 33 , N (CH 3 ) 3 CH 2 C 6 H 5 Etc.
一般式(G-2)のZを構成成分とする含窒素複素環としては、例えば、テトラゾール環、トリアゾール環、イミダゾール環、オキサジアゾール環、チアジアゾール環、インドール環、オキサゾール環、ベンゾオキサゾール環、ベンズイミダゾール環、ベンゾチアゾール環、ベンゾセレナゾール環、ナフトオキサゾール環等が挙げられる。 Examples of the nitrogen-containing heterocycle having Z as a constituent in the general formula (G-2) include, for example, a tetrazole ring, a triazole ring, an imidazole ring, an oxadiazole ring, a thiadiazole ring, an indole ring, an oxazole ring, a benzoxazole ring, Examples include a benzimidazole ring, a benzothiazole ring, a benzoselenazole ring, and a naphthoxazole ring.
一般式(G-2)において、Rg21で表される具体的な基としては、ハロゲン原子(例えば、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子等)アルキル基(例えば、メチル、エチル、プロピル、i-プロピル、ブチル、t-ブチル、ペンチル、シクロペンチル、ヘキシル、シクロヘキシル、オクチル、ドデシル、ヒドロキシエチル、メトキシエチル、トリフルオロメチル、ベンジル等)、アリール基(例えば、フェニル、ナフチル等)、アルキルカルボンアミド基(例えば、アセチルアミノ、プロピオニルアミノ、ブチロイルアミノ等)、アリールカルボンアミド基(例えば、ベンゾイルアミノ等)、アルキルスルホンアミド基(例えば、メタンスルホニルアミノ基、エタンスルホニルアミノ基等)、アリールスルホンアミド基(例えば、ベンゼンスルホニルアミノ基、トルエンスルホニルアミノ基等)、アリールオキシ基(例えば、フェノキシ等)、アルキルチオ基(例えば、メチルチオ、エチルチオ、ブチルチオ等)、アリールチオ基(例えば、フェニルチオ基、トリルチオ基等)、アルキルカルバモイル基(例えばメチルカルバモイル、ジメチルカルバモイル、エチルカルバモイル、ジエチルカルバモイル、ジブチルカルバモイル、ピペリジルカルバモイル、モルホリルカルバモイル等)、アリールカルバモイル基(例えば、フェニルカルバモイル、メチルフェニルカルバモイル、エチルフェニルカルバモイル、ベンジルフェニルカルバモイル等)、アルキルスルファモイル基(例えば、メチルスルファモイル、ジメチルスルファモイル、エチルスルファモイル、ジエチルスルファモイル、ジブチルスルファモイル、ピペリジルスルファモイル、モルホリルスルファモイル等)、アリールスルファモイル基(例えば、フェニルスルファモイル、メチルフェニルスルファモイル、エチルフェニルスルファモイル、ベンジルフェニルスルファモイル等)、アルキルスルホニル基(例えば、メタンスルホニル基、エタンスルホニル基等)、アリールスルホニル基(例えば、フェニルスルホニル、4-クロロフェニルスルホニル、p-トルエンスルホニル等)アルコキシカルボニル基(例えば、メトキシカルボニル、エトキシカルボニル、ブトキシカルボニル等)、アリールオキシカルボニル基(例えばフェノキシカルボニル等)、アルキルカルボニル基(例えば、アセチル、プロピオニル、ブチロイル等)、アリールカルボニル基(例えば、ベンゾイル基、アルキルベンゾイル基等)、アシルオキシ基(例えば、アセチルオキシ、プロピオニルオキシ、ブチロイルオキシ等)、複素環基(例えば、オキサゾール環、チアゾール環、トリアゾール環、セレナゾール環、テトラゾール環、オキサジアゾール環、チアジアゾール環、チアジン環、トリアジン環、ベンズオキサゾール環、ベンズチアゾール環、インドレニン環、ベンズセレナゾール環、ナフトチアゾール環、トリアザインドリジン環、ジアザインドリジン環、テトラアザインドリジン環基等)が挙げられる。これらの置換基はさらに置換基を有するものを含む。 In the general formula (G-2), the specific group represented by Rg 21 is a halogen atom (eg, fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom) alkyl group (eg, methyl, ethyl, propyl) I-propyl, butyl, t-butyl, pentyl, cyclopentyl, hexyl, cyclohexyl, octyl, dodecyl, hydroxyethyl, methoxyethyl, trifluoromethyl, benzyl, etc.), aryl group (eg, phenyl, naphthyl, etc.), alkylcarboxylic Amido group (eg, acetylamino, propionylamino, butyroylamino, etc.), arylcarbonamide group (eg, benzoylamino, etc.), alkylsulfonamide group (eg, methanesulfonylamino group, ethanesulfonylamino group, etc.), arylsulfone An amide group (eg , Benzenesulfonylamino group, toluenesulfonylamino group etc.), aryloxy group (eg phenoxy etc.), alkylthio group (eg methylthio, ethylthio, butylthio etc.), arylthio group (eg phenylthio group, tolylthio group etc.), alkyl Carbamoyl group (for example, methylcarbamoyl, dimethylcarbamoyl, ethylcarbamoyl, diethylcarbamoyl, dibutylcarbamoyl, piperidylcarbamoyl, morpholylcarbamoyl, etc.), arylcarbamoyl group (for example, phenylcarbamoyl, methylphenylcarbamoyl, ethylphenylcarbamoyl, benzylphenylcarbamoyl, etc.) Alkylsulfamoyl groups (eg methylsulfamoyl, dimethylsulfamoyl, ethylsulfamoyl, diethyl) Sulfamoyl, dibutylsulfamoyl, piperidylsulfamoyl, morpholylsulfamoyl, etc.), arylsulfamoyl groups (eg, phenylsulfamoyl, methylphenylsulfamoyl, ethylphenylsulfamoyl, benzylphenylsulfamoyl) Etc.), alkylsulfonyl groups (eg methanesulfonyl group, ethanesulfonyl group etc.), arylsulfonyl groups (eg phenylsulfonyl, 4-chlorophenylsulfonyl, p-toluenesulfonyl etc.) alkoxycarbonyl groups (eg methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl) , Butoxycarbonyl etc.), aryloxycarbonyl group (eg phenoxycarbonyl etc.), alkylcarbonyl group (eg acetyl, propionyl, butyroyl etc.), aryl Rubonyl group (for example, benzoyl group, alkylbenzoyl group, etc.), acyloxy group (for example, acetyloxy, propionyloxy, butyroyloxy, etc.), heterocyclic group (for example, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, triazole ring, selenazole ring, tetrazole ring, Oxadiazole ring, thiadiazole ring, thiazine ring, triazine ring, benzoxazole ring, benzthiazole ring, indolenine ring, benzselenazole ring, naphthothiazole ring, triazaindolizine ring, diazaindolizine ring, tetraazaind Lysine ring group). These substituents further include those having a substituent.
次に、一般式(G-2)で表される化合物の好ましい具体例を示すが、本発明はこれらの化合物に限定されるものではない。 Next, preferred specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (G-2) will be shown, but the present invention is not limited to these compounds.
上記例示した各化合物の中でも、本発明の目的効果をいかんなく発揮できる観点から、特に、例示化合物G2-12、G2-18、G2-20が好ましい。 Of the above-exemplified compounds, Exemplified Compounds G2-12, G2-18, and G2-20 are particularly preferable from the viewpoint that the objective effects of the present invention can be exhibited.
〔酸化還元されうる補助化合物〕
本発明の表示素子においては、エレクトロクロミック材料の電気化学反応を促進するために、前記エレクトロクロミック化合物に加え、酸化還元されうる補助化合物(以下、プロモーターと記す)を添加しても良い。プロモーターは、酸化還元反応の結果として、可視領域(400~700nm)の光学濃度が変化しないものでも良いし、変化するもの、即ち前記エレクトロクロミック化合物であっても良く、電極上に固定化されていても良く、電解質中に添加されていても良い。これらプロモーターは、例えば、対極反応物質としての利用或いは、酸化還元メディエーターとしての利用が考えられる。
[Auxiliary compounds that can be redox]
In the display element of the present invention, in order to promote the electrochemical reaction of the electrochromic material, an auxiliary compound (hereinafter referred to as a promoter) that can be oxidized and reduced may be added in addition to the electrochromic compound. The promoter may be one that does not change the optical density in the visible region (400 to 700 nm) as a result of the oxidation-reduction reaction, or one that changes, that is, the electrochromic compound, and is immobilized on the electrode. It may be added to the electrolyte. These promoters can be used, for example, as counter electrode reactants or as redox mediators.
例えば、表示電極側でエレクトロクロミック化合物を酸化(或いは還元)発色させる場合、対向電極側でプロモーターの還元(或いは酸化)反応を利用することによって、低い駆動電圧で高い発色濃度を得ることが可能となる。このように、プロモーターを対極反応物質として利用する場合、エレクトロクロミック化合物を表示電極上に固定化し、エレクトロクロミック化合物とは逆の酸化還元活性を有するプロモーターを、対向電極上に固定化して用いることが好ましい。プロモーターを対極物質として用いる場合、プロモーターは酸化還元反応の結果として可視領域(400~700nm)の光学濃度が変化しないものが好ましい。但し、本発明の好ましい態様において記載したように、表示素子中に白色散乱物を用いて、プロモーターによる発色を遮蔽するような態様の場合、可視領域(400~700nm)の光学濃度が変化するプロモーター、即ちエレクトロクロミック化合物を用いても良い。このような構成の態様は、プロモーターの選択が容易と成り好ましい。また別の態様として、表示電極側のエレクトロクロミック化合物と同色の発色を示すプロモーターを用いることは、好ましい態様のひとつである。 For example, when an electrochromic compound is oxidized (or reduced) in color on the display electrode side, a high color density can be obtained with a low driving voltage by using a reduction (or oxidation) reaction of a promoter on the counter electrode side. Become. Thus, when a promoter is used as a counter electrode reactant, an electrochromic compound is immobilized on a display electrode, and a promoter having redox activity opposite to that of the electrochromic compound is immobilized on a counter electrode. preferable. When a promoter is used as the counter electrode material, it is preferable that the promoter does not change the optical density in the visible region (400 to 700 nm) as a result of the redox reaction. However, as described in the preferred embodiment of the present invention, in the case where the white light scattering material is used in the display element and the color development by the promoter is shielded, the promoter in which the optical density in the visible region (400 to 700 nm) changes. That is, an electrochromic compound may be used. Such a configuration is preferable because it facilitates selection of a promoter. As another embodiment, it is one of preferred embodiments to use a promoter that exhibits the same color as the electrochromic compound on the display electrode side.
一方、酸化還元メディエーターは、有機電解合成の分野等で一般に用いられている材料である。有機化合物はそれぞれ固有の酸化電位に加えて、電解法や電解条件にも依存する酸化過電圧を有しており、陽極電位がこれらを合わせた酸化電位より高いときに、実際上酸化反応が起こる。陽極電位に実験上の限界があることから、直接法で全ての基質を酸化することは不可能である。高い酸化電位を有する基質を酸化する場合、基質から陽極への電子移動は起こらない。この反応系に低電位で陽極に対して電子移動(酸化)が起こるようなメディエーターを共存させると、まずはメディエーターが酸化され、酸化されたメディエーターによって基質が酸化されて生成物が得られる。この反応系の利点は、基質の酸化電位よりも低い陽極電位で基質を酸化することが可能であることと、酸化されたメディエーターは、基質を酸化してもとのメディエーターに戻るため、理論的には触媒として作用することである。また、低電位での酸化が可能となるため、基質や生成物の分解等も抑えられる。 Meanwhile, the redox mediator is a material generally used in the field of organic electrolytic synthesis. Each organic compound has an oxidation overvoltage that depends on the electrolysis method and electrolysis conditions in addition to its own oxidation potential. When the anode potential is higher than the combined oxidation potential, an oxidation reaction actually occurs. Due to experimental limitations on the anodic potential, it is not possible to oxidize all substrates by direct methods. When a substrate having a high oxidation potential is oxidized, no electron transfer from the substrate to the anode occurs. When a mediator that causes electron transfer (oxidation) to the anode at a low potential coexists in this reaction system, the mediator is first oxidized, and the substrate is oxidized by the oxidized mediator to obtain a product. The advantage of this reaction system is that it is possible to oxidize the substrate at an anodic potential lower than the oxidation potential of the substrate, and that the oxidized mediator returns to the original mediator when the substrate is oxidized. It acts as a catalyst. In addition, since oxidation at a low potential is possible, decomposition of the substrate and product can be suppressed.
本発明において、例えば、前記基質として酸化発色するエレクトロクロミック化合物を用いる場合、触媒の酸化メディエーターを共存させることにより、低い駆動電圧で表示素子を駆動することが可能と成り、表示素子の耐久性が高まる。また表示の切り替え速度の向上、高い発色効率が得られるなどの利点がある。同様に、還元メディエーターと、還元発色するエレクトロクロミック化合物の組み合わせでも、上記効果が得られる。 In the present invention, for example, when an electrochromic compound that oxidizes and colors is used as the substrate, it is possible to drive the display element with a low driving voltage by coexisting an oxidation mediator of the catalyst, and the durability of the display element is improved. Rise. In addition, there are advantages such as an improvement in display switching speed and high coloring efficiency. Similarly, the above-described effect can be obtained by a combination of a reducing mediator and an electrochromic compound that produces a reducing color.
本発明の表示素子においては、有機電解合成の分野で示されているように、単一のメディエーターを用いても良いし、複数のメディエーターを組み合わせて用いても良い。本発明においてプロモーターをメディエーターとして用いる場合、エレクトロクロミック化合物を表示電極上に固定化し、その近傍にプロモーターを局在化させて用いることが好ましい。 In the display element of the present invention, as shown in the field of organic electrosynthesis, a single mediator may be used, or a plurality of mediators may be used in combination. In the present invention, when a promoter is used as a mediator, it is preferable to fix an electrochromic compound on a display electrode and localize the promoter in the vicinity thereof.
本発明においては、プロモーターを対極反応物質として用いてもよく、またメディエーターとして用いても良い。また両者の目的で、複数のプロモーターを同時に組み合わせて用いても良い。 In the present invention, a promoter may be used as a counter electrode reactant or a mediator. For both purposes, a plurality of promoters may be used in combination at the same time.
プロモーターとしては、特に制限はなく、目的に応じて適宜選択することができる。特に対極反応物質として利用する場合には、公知のエレクトロクロミック化合物を利用することが可能である。また酸化還元メディエーターとして利用する場合は、表示色素として用いるエレクトロクロミック化合物の特性に合わせ、有機合成化学協会誌第43巻第6号(「電気エネルギーを利用する有機合成」特集号)(1985)等に記載されている公知のメディエーターを適宜選択して用いることができる。 The promoter is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected depending on the purpose. In particular, when used as a counter electrode reactant, a known electrochromic compound can be used. When used as a redox mediator, according to the characteristics of the electrochromic compound used as the display dye, Journal of Organic Synthetic Chemistry, Vol. 43, No. 6 (Special Issue on “Organic Synthesis Using Electric Energy”) (1985), etc. The known mediators described in 1) can be appropriately selected and used.
本発明に用いることができる好ましいプロモーターとしては、例えば、以下のような化合物が挙げられる。 Examples of preferred promoters that can be used in the present invention include the following compounds.
1)TEMPO等に代表されるN-オキシル誘導体、N-ヒドロキシフタルイミド誘導体、ヒドロキサム酸誘導体等、N-O結合を有する化合物、
2)ガルビノキシル等、0-位に嵩高い置換基を導入したアリロキシ遊離基を有する化合物、
3)フェロセン等、メタロセン誘導体、
4)ベンジル(ジフェニルエタンジオン)誘導体、
5)テトラゾリウム塩/ホルマザン誘導体、
6)フェナジン、フェノチアジン、フェノキサジン、アクリジン等のアジン系化合物、
7)ビオロゲン等ピリジニウム化合物。
1) N-oxyl derivatives represented by TEMPO and the like, N-hydroxyphthalimide derivatives, hydroxamic acid derivatives and the like, compounds having an N—O bond,
2) a compound having an allyloxy free radical having a bulky substituent introduced at the 0-position, such as galvinoxyl;
3) Metallocene derivatives such as ferrocene,
4) benzyl (diphenylethanedione) derivative,
5) Tetrazolium salt / formazan derivative,
6) Azine compounds such as phenazine, phenothiazine, phenoxazine, acridine,
7) Pyridinium compounds such as viologen.
その他、ベンゾキノン誘導体、ベルダジル等ヒドラジル遊離基化合物、チアジル遊離基化合物、ヒドラゾン誘導体、フェニレンジアミン誘導体、トリアリルアミン誘導体、テトラチアフルバレン誘導体、テトラシアノキノジメタン誘導体、チアントレン誘導体等もプロモーターとして用いることができる。 In addition, hydrazyl free radical compounds such as benzoquinone derivatives, verdazil, thiazyl free radical compounds, hydrazone derivatives, phenylenediamine derivatives, triallylamine derivatives, tetrathiafulvalene derivatives, tetracyanoquinodimethane derivatives, thianthrene derivatives, etc. can also be used as promoters .
本発明の表示素子においては、上記1)から7)の範疇のプロモーターが好ましく、特に1)が好ましい。 In the display element of the present invention, promoters in the categories 1) to 7) are preferable, and 1) is particularly preferable.
以下、上記1)の範疇の化合物について、その詳細を説明する。 Hereinafter, the details of the compounds in the category 1) will be described.
N-オキシル(ニトロキシドラジカルとも呼ばれる)とは、ヒドロキシルアミンの酸素-水素結合がラジカル的に開裂して生じた酸素中心ラジカルである。ニトロキシドラジカルは、下記スキームに示すように2つの可逆的な酸化還元対を有することが知られている。ニトロキシドラジカルは1電子酸化によりオキソアンモニウムカチオンとなり、これが還元されてラジカルを再生する。またニトロキシドラジカルは1電子還元によりアミノキシアニオンとなり、これが酸化されてラジカルを再生する。従って、ニトロキシドラジカルはp型の対極反応物質、若しくはn型対極反応物質として機能することができる。 N-oxyl (also called nitroxide radical) is an oxygen-centered radical generated by radically cleaving the oxygen-hydrogen bond of hydroxylamine. Nitroxide radicals are known to have two reversible redox pairs as shown in the scheme below. The nitroxide radical becomes an oxoammonium cation by one-electron oxidation, which is reduced to regenerate the radical. The nitroxide radical is converted into an aminoxy anion by one-electron reduction, which is oxidized to regenerate the radical. Therefore, the nitroxide radical can function as a p-type counter electrode reactant or an n-type counter electrode reactant.
N-オキシル誘導体を電極表面上に固定化する方法は、N-オキシル誘導体に電極表面と化学吸着または物理吸着する基を導入する方法やN-オキシル誘導体をポリマー化して電極表面上に薄膜を形成する方法などが挙げられる。尚、N-オキシル誘導体はN-オキシルラジカルの状態で添加しても良く、またN-ヒドロキシ化合物の状態、更にはオキソアンモニウムカチオンの状態で添加しても良い。 The N-oxyl derivative is immobilized on the electrode surface by introducing a group that chemically or physically adsorbs to the electrode surface into the N-oxyl derivative, or by polymerizing the N-oxyl derivative to form a thin film on the electrode surface. The method of doing is mentioned. The N-oxyl derivative may be added in the form of an N-oxyl radical, or in the form of an N-hydroxy compound, and further in the form of an oxoammonium cation.
N-オキシル誘導体としては、TEMPO(2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジニル-N-オキシル)をはじめ、各種置換基を置換した誘導体が市販されている。また、公知の文献に従って、ポリマーを含め、各種誘導体を容易に合成することができる。 As N-oxyl derivatives, TEMPO (2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidinyl-N-oxyl) and other derivatives substituted with various substituents are commercially available. In addition, various derivatives including polymers can be easily synthesized according to known literature.
一般に、ニトロキシドラジカルのα位炭素に水素が置換している場合、容易にヒドロキシアミンとニトロンへ不均化してしまうことが知られている。このため、TEMPOのN-オキシル基α位の4つのメチル基は、安定ラジカルとして存在する上での必須の構造と言えるが、逆にこれら4つのメチル基の立体障害によって、反応性が落ちる場合がある。これら活性低下を引き起こさない点で、アザアダマンタンN-オキシル誘導体、或いはアザビシクロN-オキシル誘導体が好ましい。 Generally, it is known that when hydrogen is substituted at the α-position carbon of the nitroxide radical, it is easily disproportionated to hydroxyamine and nitrone. For this reason, the four methyl groups at the N-oxyl group α position of TEMPO can be said to be an essential structure for existing as a stable radical, but conversely, the reactivity decreases due to steric hindrance of these four methyl groups. There is. Azaadamantane N-oxyl derivatives or azabicyclo N-oxyl derivatives are preferred because they do not cause a decrease in activity.
次に、N-ヒドロキシフタルイミド誘導体、ヒドロキサム酸誘導体等について説明する。下記スキームに示すように、N-ヒドロキシフタルイミド(NHPI)の電極酸化により生じたフタルイミドN-オキシル(PINO)は、2級アルコールを酸化してケトンを生成する。この例から分かるように、NHPI/PINOの酸化還元対は、本発明の表示素子においても、対極反応物質或いはメディエーターとして機能することが理解されよう。またNHPI同様、ヒドロキサム酸誘導体、トリヒドロキシイミノシアヌル酸(THICA)も、プロモーターとして用いることができる。 Next, N-hydroxyphthalimide derivatives, hydroxamic acid derivatives, etc. will be described. As shown in the following scheme, phthalimide N-oxyl (PINO) generated by electrode oxidation of N-hydroxyphthalimide (NHPI) oxidizes a secondary alcohol to form a ketone. As can be seen from this example, it is understood that the redox couple of NHPI / PINO functions as a counter electrode reactant or mediator also in the display element of the present invention. As with NHPI, hydroxamic acid derivatives and trihydroxyimino cyanuric acid (THICA) can also be used as promoters.
これらの化合物を用いて、本発明の表示素子を作製する場合、N-OHの状態で添加することが好ましい。N-OHの状態で表示素子を作製した後、表示素子を駆動させて酸化をすることでラジカルが生成する。 When the display element of the present invention is produced using these compounds, it is preferably added in the state of N—OH. After the display element is manufactured in the N—OH state, radicals are generated by driving the display element and performing oxidation.
上記1)の範疇で示されるプロモーターは、下記一般式(M1)で表すことが出来、下記一般式(M2)から(M5)で表されるプロモーターが好ましい。特に一般式(M6)で示される、多環式N-オキシル誘導体が好ましい。 The promoter shown in the above category 1) can be represented by the following general formula (M1), and promoters represented by the following general formulas (M2) to (M5) are preferable. In particular, a polycyclic N-oxyl derivative represented by the general formula (M6) is preferable.
尚、一般式(M1)から(M5)表されるプロモーターは各種市販されており、容易に入手することができる。また公知の文献に従って、各種誘導体を容易に合成することができる。一般式(M6)で示されるプロモーターは、J.Am.Chem.Soc.,128,8412(2006)及びTetrahedron Letters 49(2008)48-52を参考として合成することができる。 Various promoters represented by the general formulas (M1) to (M5) are commercially available and can be easily obtained. Various derivatives can be easily synthesized according to known literature. The promoter represented by the general formula (M6) is J.P. Am. Chem. Soc. , 128, 8412 (2006) and Tetrahedron Letters 49 (2008) 48-52.
またこれらをポリマー化したプロモーターは、例えば特開2004-227946号公報、同2004-228008号公報、同2006-73240号公報、同2007-35375号公報、同2007-70384号公報、同2007-184227号公報、同2007-298713号公報等を参考にして合成することができる。 Promoters obtained by polymerizing these are, for example, JP-A Nos. 2004-227946, 2004-228008, 2006-73240, 2007-35375, 2007-70384, and 2007-184227. No. 2007, No. 2007-298713, and the like can be synthesized.
上記一般式(M1)において、Rm11及びRm12は各々独立に置換基を有しても良い脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基、複素環基、または>C=O、>C=S、または>C=N-Rm13を介して窒素原子と結合する基を表す。Rm13は水素原子、置換基を有しても良い脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基、または複素環基を表す。また、Rm11及びRm12は互いに連結して、環状構造を形成しても良い。 In the general formula (M1), Rm 11 and Rm 12 are each independently an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, a heterocyclic group, or>C═O,> C═ S or a group bonded to a nitrogen atom via> C═N—Rm 13 is represented. Rm 13 represents a hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted aliphatic hydrocarbon group, aromatic hydrocarbon group or heterocyclic group. Rm 11 and Rm 12 may be connected to each other to form a cyclic structure.
脂肪族炭化水素基には、鎖状及び環状のものが包含され、鎖状のものには直鎖状のもの及び分岐状のものが包含される。このような脂肪族炭化水素基には、メチル、エチル、ビニル、プロピル、イソプロピル、プロペニル、ブチル、iso-ブチル、tert-ブチル、ペンチル、イソペンチル、ネオペンチル、ヘキシル、iso-ヘキシル、シクロヘキシル、シクロヘキセニル、オクチル、iso-オクチル、シクロオクチル、2,3-ジメチル-2-ブチル等の各基が挙げられる。 The aliphatic hydrocarbon group includes chain and cyclic groups, and the chain group includes linear and branched groups. Such aliphatic hydrocarbon groups include methyl, ethyl, vinyl, propyl, isopropyl, propenyl, butyl, iso-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, iso-hexyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexenyl, Examples include octyl, iso-octyl, cyclooctyl, 2,3-dimethyl-2-butyl and the like.
芳香族炭化水素基としては、フェニル基、ナフチル基等が挙げられ、複素環基としては、ピリジル基、チアゾリル基、オキサゾリル基、イミダゾリル基、フリル基、ピロリル基、ピラジニル基、ピリミジニル基、ピリダジニル基、セレナゾリル基、スルホラニル基、ピペリジニル基、ピラゾリル基、テトラゾリル基、モルフォリノ基等が挙げられる。 Examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon group include a phenyl group and a naphthyl group. Examples of the heterocyclic group include a pyridyl group, a thiazolyl group, an oxazolyl group, an imidazolyl group, a furyl group, a pyrrolyl group, a pyrazinyl group, a pyrimidinyl group, and a pyridazinyl group. , Serenazolyl group, sulfolanyl group, piperidinyl group, pyrazolyl group, tetrazolyl group, morpholino group and the like.
これら置換基は更に置換基を有していても良い。それらの置換基には、特に制限は無く例えば、アルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、tert-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、オクチル基、ドデシル基、トリデシル基、テトラデシル基、ペンタデシル基等)、シクロアルキル基(例えば、シクロプロピル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基等)、アルケニル基(例えば、ビニル基、アリル基、ブテニル基、オクテニル基等)、シクロアルケニル基(例えば、2-シクロペンテン-1-イル基、2-シクロヘキセン-1-イル基等)、アルキニル基(例えば、プロパルギル基、エチニル基、トリメチルシリルエチニル基等)、アリール基(例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基、p-トリル基、m-クロロフェニル基、o-ヘキサデカノイルアミノフェニル基等)、複素環基(例えば、ピリジル基、チアゾリル基、オキサゾリル基、イミダゾリル基、フリル基、ピロリル基、ピラジニル基、ピリミジニル基、ピリダジニル基、セレナゾリル基、スルホラニル基、ピペリジニル基、ピラゾリル基、テトラゾリル基、モルフォリノ基等)、複素環オキシ基(例えば、1-フェニルテトラゾール-5-オキシ基、2-テトラヒドロピラニルオキシ基、ピリジルオキシ基、チアゾリルオキシ基、オキサゾリルオキシ基、イミダゾリルオキシ基等)、ハロゲン原子(例えば、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子、フッ素原子等)、アルコキシ基(例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロピルオキシ基、tert-ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、オクチルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基等)、シクロアルコキシ基(例えば、シクロペンチルオキシ基、シクロヘキシルオキシ基等)、アリールオキシ基(例えば、フェノキシ基、2-ナフチルオキシ基、2-メチルフェノキシ基、4-tert-ブチルフェノキシ基、3-ニトロフェノキシ基、2-テトラデカノイルアミノフェノキシ基等)、アルキルチオ基(例えば、メチルチオ基、エチルチオ基、プロピルチオ基、ペンチルチオ基、ヘキシルチオ基、オクチルチオ基、ドデシルチオ基等)、シクロアルキルチオ基(例えば、シクロペンチルチオ基、シクロヘキシルチオ基等)、アリールチオ基(例えば、フェニルチオ基、1-ナフチルチオ基等)、複素環チオ基(例えば、ピリジルチオ基、チアゾリルチオ基、オキサゾリルチオ基、イミダゾリルチオ基、フリルチオ基、ピロリルチオ基等)、アルコキシカルボニル基(例えば、メトキシカルボニル基、エトキシカルボニル基、ブトキシカルボニル基、オクチルオキシカルボニル基、ドデシルオキシカルボニル基等)、アリールオキシカルボニル基(例えば、フェニルオキシカルボニル基、ナフチルオキシカルボニル基等)、スルファモイル基(例えば、アミノスルホニル基、メチルアミノスルホニル基、ジメチルアミノスルホニル基、ブチルアミノスルホニル基、ヘキシルアミノスルホニル基、シクロヘキシルアミノスルホニル基、オクチルアミノスルホニル基、ドデシルアミノスルホニル基、フェニルアミノスルホニル基、ナフチルアミノスルホニル基、2-ピリジルアミノスルホニル基、モルフォリノスルホニル基、ピロリジノスルホニル基等)、ウレイド基(例えば、メチルウレイド基、エチルウレイド基、ペンチルウレイド基、シクロヘキシルウレイド基、オクチルウレイド基、ドデシルウレイド基、フェニルウレイド基、ナフチルウレイド基、2-ピリジルアミノウレイド基等)、アシル基(例えば、アセチル基、エチルカルボニル基、プロピルカルボニル基、ペンチルカルボニル基、シクロヘキシルカルボニル基、オクチルカルボニル基、2-エチルヘキシルカルボニル基、ドデシルカルボニル基、フェニルカルボニル基、ナフチルカルボニル基、ピリジルカルボニル基等)、アシルオキシ基(例えば、ホルミルオキシ基、アセチルオキシ基、ピバロイルオキシ基、ステアロイルオキシ基、ベンゾイルオキシ基、p-メトキシフェニルカルボニルオキシ基、エチルカルボニルオキシ基、ブチルカルボニルオキシ基、オクチルカルボニルオキシ基、ドデシルカルボニルオキシ基、フェニルカルボニルオキシ基等)、アシルアミノ基(例えば、アセチルアミノ基、ベンゾイルアミノ基、ホルミルアミノ基、ピバロイルアミノ基、ラウロイルアミノ基、3,4,5-トリ-n-オクチルオキシフェニルカルボニルアミノ基等)、カルバモイル基(例えば、アミノカルボニル基、メチルアミノカルボニル基、ジメチルアミノカルボニル基、プロピルアミノカルボニル基、ペンチルアミノカルボニル基、シクロヘキシルアミノカルボニル基、オクチルアミノカルボニル基、2-エチルヘキシルアミノカルボニル基、ドデシルアミノカルボニル基、フェニルアミノカルボニル基、ナフチルアミノカルボニル基、2-ピリジルアミノカルボニル基、モルフォリノカルボニル基、ピペラジノカルボニル基等)、アルカンスルフィニル基またはアリールスルフィニル基(例えば、メタンスルフィニル基、エタンスルフィニル基、ブタンスルフィニル基、シクロヘキサンスルフィニル基、2-エチルヘキサンスルフィニル基、ドデカンスルフィニル基、フェニルスルフィニル基、ナフチルスルフィニル基、2-ピリジルスルフィニル基等)、アルカンスルホニル基またはアリールスルホニル基(例えば、メタンスルホニル基、エタンスルホニル基、ブタンスルホニル基、シクロヘキサンスルホニル基、2-エチルヘキサンスルホニル基、ドデカンスルホニル基、フェニルスルホニル基、ナフチルスルホニル基、2-ピリジルスルホニル基等)、アミノ基(例えば、アミノ基、メチルアミノ基、エチルアミノ基、ジメチルアミノ基、ブチルアミノ基、シクロペンチルアミノ基、2-エチルヘキシルアミノ基、ドデシルアミノ基、アニリノ基、N-メチルアニリノ基、ジフェニルアミノ基、ナフチルアミノ基、2-ピリジルアミノ基等)、シリルオキシ基(例えば、トリメチルシリルオキシ基、tert-ブチルジメチルシリルオキシ基等)、アミノカルボニルオキシ基(例えば、N,N-ジメチルカルバモイルオキシ基、N,N-ジエチルカルバモイルオキシ基、モルホリノカルボニルオキシ基、N,N-ジ-n-オクチルアミノカルボニルオキシ基、N-n-オクチルカルバモイルオキシ基等)、アルコキシカルボニルオキシ基(例えば、メトキシカルボニルオキシ基、エトキシカルボニルオキシ基、tert-ブトキシカルボニルオキシ基、n-オクチルカルボニルオキシ基等)、アリールオキシカルボニルオキシ基(例えば、フェノキシカルボニルオキシ基、p-メトキシフェノキシカルボニルオキシ基、p-n-ヘキサデシルオキシフェノキシカルボニルオキシ基等)、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基(例えば、メトキシカルボニルアミノ基、エトキシカルボニルアミノ基、tert-ブトキシカルボニルアミノ基、n-オクタデシルオキシカルボニルアミノ基、N-メチル-メトキシカルボニルアミノ基等)、アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基(例えば、フェノキシカルボニルアミノ基、p-クロロフェノキシカルボニルアミノ基、m-n-オクチルオキシフェノキシカルボニルアミノ基等)、スルファモイルアミノ基(例えば、スルファモイルアミノ基、N,N-ジメチルアミノスルホニルアミノ基、N-n-オクチルアミノスルホニルアミノ基等)、メルカプト基、アリールアゾ基(例えば、フェニルアゾ基、ナフチルアゾ基、p-クロロフェニルアゾ基等)、複素環アゾ基(例えば、ピリジルアゾ基、チアゾリルアゾ基、オキサゾリルアゾ基、イミダゾリルアゾ基、フリルアゾ基、ピロリルアゾ基、5-エチルチオ-1,3,4-チアジアゾール-2-イルアゾ基等)、イミノ基(例えば、N-スクシンイミド-1-イル基、N-フタルイミド-1-イル基等)、ホスフィノ基(例えば、ジメチルホスフィノ基、ジフェニルホスフィノ基、メチルフェノキシホスフィノ基等)、ホスフィニル基(例えば、ホスフィニル基、ジオクチルオキシホスフィニル基、ジエトキシホスフィニル基等)、ホスフィニルオキシ基(例えば、ジフェノキシホスフィニルオキシ基、ジオクチルオキシホスフィニルオキシ基等)、ホスフィニルアミノ基(例えば、ジメトキシホスフィニルアミノ基、ジメチルアミノホスフィニルアミノ基等)、シリル基(例えば、トリメチルシリル基、tert-ブチルジメチルシリル基、フェニルジメチルシリル基等)、シアノ基、ニトロ基、ヒドロキシル基、スルホ基、カルボキシル基等が挙げられる。 These substituents may further have a substituent. These substituents are not particularly limited, and examples thereof include alkyl groups (for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, tert-butyl group, pentyl group, hexyl group, octyl group, dodecyl group, tridecyl group, Tetradecyl group, pentadecyl group etc.), cycloalkyl group (eg cyclopropyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group etc.), alkenyl group (eg vinyl group, allyl group, butenyl group, octenyl group etc.), cycloalkenyl group (eg 2-cyclopenten-1-yl group, 2-cyclohexen-1-yl group, etc.), alkynyl group (eg, propargyl group, ethynyl group, trimethylsilylethynyl group, etc.), aryl group (eg, phenyl group, naphthyl group, p -Tolyl group, m-chlorophenyl group, o-hexadecanoylamino Phenyl group, etc.), heterocyclic group (for example, pyridyl group, thiazolyl group, oxazolyl group, imidazolyl group, furyl group, pyrrolyl group, pyrazinyl group, pyrimidinyl group, pyridazinyl group, selenazolyl group, sulfolanyl group, piperidinyl group, pyrazolyl group, Tetrazolyl group, morpholino group, etc.), heterocyclic oxy group (for example, 1-phenyltetrazol-5-oxy group, 2-tetrahydropyranyloxy group, pyridyloxy group, thiazolyloxy group, oxazolyloxy group, imidazolyloxy group, etc.) ), Halogen atoms (for example, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom, fluorine atom, etc.), alkoxy groups (for example, methoxy group, ethoxy group, propyloxy group, tert-butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, octyl) Oxy group, dodecyloxy Group), cycloalkoxy group (eg, cyclopentyloxy group, cyclohexyloxy group, etc.), aryloxy group (eg, phenoxy group, 2-naphthyloxy group, 2-methylphenoxy group, 4-tert-butylphenoxy group, 3 -Nitrophenoxy group, 2-tetradecanoylaminophenoxy group, etc.), alkylthio group (eg, methylthio group, ethylthio group, propylthio group, pentylthio group, hexylthio group, octylthio group, dodecylthio group, etc.), cycloalkylthio group (eg, Cyclopentylthio group, cyclohexylthio group, etc.), arylthio group (eg, phenylthio group, 1-naphthylthio group, etc.), heterocyclic thio group (eg, pyridylthio group, thiazolylthio group, oxazolylthio group, imidazolylthio group, furylthio group, pinyl) Rorylthio group, etc.), alkoxycarbonyl group (eg, methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl group, butoxycarbonyl group, octyloxycarbonyl group, dodecyloxycarbonyl group, etc.), aryloxycarbonyl group (eg, phenyloxycarbonyl group, naphthyloxycarbonyl) Group), sulfamoyl group (for example, aminosulfonyl group, methylaminosulfonyl group, dimethylaminosulfonyl group, butylaminosulfonyl group, hexylaminosulfonyl group, cyclohexylaminosulfonyl group, octylaminosulfonyl group, dodecylaminosulfonyl group, phenylamino) Sulfonyl group, naphthylaminosulfonyl group, 2-pyridylaminosulfonyl group, morpholinosulfonyl group, pyrrolidinosulfonyl group, etc.), ureido (Eg, methylureido group, ethylureido group, pentylureido group, cyclohexylureido group, octylureido group, dodecylureido group, phenylureido group, naphthylureido group, 2-pyridylaminoureido group, etc.), acyl group (eg, acetyl group Ethylcarbonyl group, propylcarbonyl group, pentylcarbonyl group, cyclohexylcarbonyl group, octylcarbonyl group, 2-ethylhexylcarbonyl group, dodecylcarbonyl group, phenylcarbonyl group, naphthylcarbonyl group, pyridylcarbonyl group, etc.), acyloxy group (for example, Formyloxy group, acetyloxy group, pivaloyloxy group, stearoyloxy group, benzoyloxy group, p-methoxyphenylcarbonyloxy group, ethylcarbonyloxy group, Rucarbonyloxy group, octylcarbonyloxy group, dodecylcarbonyloxy group, phenylcarbonyloxy group, etc.), acylamino group (for example, acetylamino group, benzoylamino group, formylamino group, pivaloylamino group, lauroylamino group, 3, 4, 5-tri-n-octyloxyphenylcarbonylamino group), carbamoyl group (for example, aminocarbonyl group, methylaminocarbonyl group, dimethylaminocarbonyl group, propylaminocarbonyl group, pentylaminocarbonyl group, cyclohexylaminocarbonyl group, octyl) Aminocarbonyl group, 2-ethylhexylaminocarbonyl group, dodecylaminocarbonyl group, phenylaminocarbonyl group, naphthylaminocarbonyl group, 2-pyridylaminocarbonyl group , Morpholinocarbonyl group, piperazinocarbonyl group, etc.), alkanesulfinyl group or arylsulfinyl group (for example, methanesulfinyl group, ethanesulfinyl group, butanesulfinyl group, cyclohexanesulfinyl group, 2-ethylhexanesulfinyl group, dodecanesulfinyl group) Phenylsulfinyl group, naphthylsulfinyl group, 2-pyridylsulfinyl group, etc.), alkanesulfonyl group or arylsulfonyl group (for example, methanesulfonyl group, ethanesulfonyl group, butanesulfonyl group, cyclohexanesulfonyl group, 2-ethylhexanesulfonyl group, Dodecanesulfonyl group, phenylsulfonyl group, naphthylsulfonyl group, 2-pyridylsulfonyl group, etc.), amino group (for example, amino group, methylamino group, Tilamino group, dimethylamino group, butylamino group, cyclopentylamino group, 2-ethylhexylamino group, dodecylamino group, anilino group, N-methylanilino group, diphenylamino group, naphthylamino group, 2-pyridylamino group, etc.), silyloxy group (Eg, trimethylsilyloxy group, tert-butyldimethylsilyloxy group, etc.), aminocarbonyloxy group (eg, N, N-dimethylcarbamoyloxy group, N, N-diethylcarbamoyloxy group, morpholinocarbonyloxy group, N, N -Di-n-octylaminocarbonyloxy group, Nn-octylcarbamoyloxy group, etc.), alkoxycarbonyloxy group (for example, methoxycarbonyloxy group, ethoxycarbonyloxy group, tert-butoxycarbonyl) Oxy group, n-octylcarbonyloxy group, etc.), aryloxycarbonyloxy group (eg, phenoxycarbonyloxy group, p-methoxyphenoxycarbonyloxy group, pn-hexadecyloxyphenoxycarbonyloxy group, etc.), alkoxycarbonylamino Groups (for example, methoxycarbonylamino group, ethoxycarbonylamino group, tert-butoxycarbonylamino group, n-octadecyloxycarbonylamino group, N-methyl-methoxycarbonylamino group, etc.), aryloxycarbonylamino groups (for example, phenoxycarbonyl) Amino group, p-chlorophenoxycarbonylamino group, mn-octyloxyphenoxycarbonylamino group, etc.), sulfamoylamino group (for example, sulfamoylamino group, N, N -Dimethylaminosulfonylamino group, Nn-octylaminosulfonylamino group, etc.), mercapto group, arylazo group (eg, phenylazo group, naphthylazo group, p-chlorophenylazo group, etc.), heterocyclic azo group (eg, pyridylazo group) , Thiazolylazo group, oxazolylazo group, imidazolylazo group, furylazo group, pyrrolylazo group, 5-ethylthio-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-ylazo group, etc.), imino group (for example, N-succinimido-1-yl group, N-phthalimido-1-yl group), phosphino group (eg dimethylphosphino group, diphenylphosphino group, methylphenoxyphosphino group etc.), phosphinyl group (eg phosphinyl group, dioctyloxyphosphinyl group, di Ethoxyphosphinyl group, etc.), phosphine Nyloxy group (for example, diphenoxyphosphinyloxy group, dioctyloxyphosphinyloxy group, etc.), phosphinylamino group (for example, dimethoxyphosphinylamino group, dimethylaminophosphinylamino group, etc.), silyl group (For example, trimethylsilyl group, tert-butyldimethylsilyl group, phenyldimethylsilyl group, etc.), cyano group, nitro group, hydroxyl group, sulfo group, carboxyl group and the like.
一般式(M1)で表される化合物は、これら置換基で連結された二量体、三量体等の多量体であっても良く、また重合体で有ってもよい。 The compound represented by the general formula (M1) may be a multimer such as a dimer or a trimer linked by these substituents, or may be a polymer.
上記一般式(M2)において、Rm21、Rm22、Rm23、Rm24は各々独立に水素原子若しくは置換基を有しても良い脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基、または複素環基を表す。また、Rm21からRm24及びZ1を構成する原子は互いに連結して、環状構造を形成しても良く、Z1は更に置換基を有していても良い。 In the general formula (M2), Rm 21 , Rm 22 , Rm 23 and Rm 24 are each independently an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group or a heterocyclic group which may have a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Represents. In addition, atoms constituting Rm 21 to Rm 24 and Z 1 may be connected to each other to form a cyclic structure, and Z 1 may further have a substituent.
前記一般式(M2)において、Rm21、Rm22、Rm23、Rm24は各々独立に水素原子若しくは置換基を有しても良い脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基、または複素環基を表すが、これら脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基、複素環基については、前記一般式(M1)におけるそれぞれと同義である。 In the general formula (M2), Rm 21 , Rm 22 , Rm 23 and Rm 24 are each independently an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group or a heterocyclic group which may have a hydrogen atom or a substituent. These aliphatic hydrocarbon groups, aromatic hydrocarbon groups, and heterocyclic groups have the same meanings as those in formula (M1).
Z1は環状構造を形成するのに必要な原子群を表し、5員環若しくは6員環を形成するのが好ましい。Z1は更に置換基を有していても良く、それらの置換基としては、前記一般式(M1)で例示したのと同様の置換基が挙げられる。また、Rm21~Rm24及びZ1を構成する原子は互いに連結して、環状構造を形成しても良く、例えば、窒素原子と共にアザノルボルネン構造、アザアダマンタン構造等の多環式構造を取っても良い。 Z 1 represents an atomic group necessary for forming a cyclic structure, and preferably forms a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring. Z 1 may further have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the same substituents as exemplified in the general formula (M1). The atoms constituting Rm 21 to Rm 24 and Z 1 may be linked to each other to form a cyclic structure. For example, a polycyclic structure such as an azanorbornene structure or an azaadamantane structure is taken together with a nitrogen atom. Also good.
一般式(M2)で表される化合物の環構造としては、ピペリジン環、若しくはピロリジン環、アザアダマンタン環が好ましい。 As the ring structure of the compound represented by the general formula (M2), a piperidine ring, a pyrrolidine ring, or an azaadamantane ring is preferable.
上記一般式(M3)において、Rm31は直接、若しくは酸素原子、窒素原子、硫黄原子を介してカルボニル炭素原子に置換する、置換基を有してもよい脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基、または複素環基を表し、Rm32は置換基を有しても良い脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基、または複素環基を表す。またRm31及びRm32は互いに連結して、環状構造を形成しても良い。 In the general formula (M3), Rm 31 is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or aromatic hydrocarbon which may be substituted directly or substituted with a carbonyl carbon atom via an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom or a sulfur atom. Rm 32 represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, or a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent. Rm 31 and Rm 32 may be connected to each other to form a ring structure.
本発明においては、本発明に係るN-オキシル誘導体が、前記一般式(M3)で表される化合物であることが好ましい態様の1つである。 In the present invention, it is one of the preferred embodiments that the N-oxyl derivative according to the present invention is a compound represented by the general formula (M3).
前記一般式(M3)において、Rm31は直接、若しくは酸素原子、窒素原子、硫黄原子を介してカルボニル炭素原子に置換する、置換基を有してもよい脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基、または複素環基を表し、Rm32は置換基を有しても良い脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基、または複素環基を表すが、これら脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基、複素環基については、一般式(M1)におけるそれぞれと同義である。また、Rm31及びRm32は互いに連結して、環状構造を形成してもよい。一般式(M3)において、Rm32は芳香族炭化水素基が好ましく、特に置換基を有しても良いフェニル基が好ましい。フェニル基上の置換基としては、シアノ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、トリフルオロメチル基等の電子吸引性基が好ましい。Rm31としては、カルボニル炭素原子に直接結合したフェニル基若しくは脂肪族炭化水素基が好ましく、特に、分岐アルキル基及びシクロアルキル基が好ましい。 In the general formula (M3), Rm 31 is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may be substituted, or an aromatic hydrocarbon, which is substituted directly or through a oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom or a sulfur atom with a carbonyl carbon atom. Rm 32 represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, or a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent, and these aliphatic hydrocarbon group, aromatic carbon group About a hydrogen group and a heterocyclic group, it is synonymous with each in general formula (M1). Rm 31 and Rm 32 may be connected to each other to form a cyclic structure. In the general formula (M3), Rm 32 is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group, particularly preferably a phenyl group which may have a substituent. The substituent on the phenyl group is preferably an electron-withdrawing group such as a cyano group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, or a trifluoromethyl group. Rm 31 is preferably a phenyl group or an aliphatic hydrocarbon group directly bonded to a carbonyl carbon atom, particularly preferably a branched alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group.
尚、一般式(M3)で表される化合物はN-OHの状態で添加し、表示素子を作製するのが好ましい。 Note that the compound represented by the general formula (M3) is preferably added in the state of N—OH to produce a display element.
上記一般式(M4)において、Z2は環状構造を形成するのに必要な原子群を表し、更に置換基を有していても良い。 In the general formula (M4), Z 2 represents an atomic group necessary for forming a cyclic structure, and may further have a substituent.
本発明においては、本発明に係るN-オキシル誘導体が、前記一般式(M4)で表される化合物であることが好ましい態様の1つである。 In the present invention, it is one of the preferred embodiments that the N-oxyl derivative according to the present invention is a compound represented by the general formula (M4).
前記一般式(M4)において、Z2は環状構造を形成するのに必要な原子群を表し、5員環若しくは6員環を形成するのが好ましい。Z2は更に置換基を有していても良く、それらの置換基としては、一般式(M1)で例示した置換基が挙げられる。また、Z2は縮合環で有っても良い。 In the general formula (M4), Z 2 represents an atomic group necessary for forming a cyclic structure, and preferably forms a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring. Z 2 may further have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the substituents exemplified in Formula (M1). Z 2 may be a condensed ring.
尚、一般式(M4)で表される化合物はN-OHの状態で添加し、表示素子を作製するのが好ましい。 Note that the compound represented by the general formula (M4) is preferably added in the state of N—OH to produce a display element.
上記一般式(M5)において、Rm51からRm55は各々独立に置換基を有しても良い脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基、複素環基を表す。 In the general formula (M5), Rm 51 to Rm 55 each independently represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, or a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent.
本発明においては、本発明に係るN-オキシル誘導体が、前記一般式(M5)で表される化合物であることが好ましい態様の1つである。 In the present invention, it is one of the preferred embodiments that the N-oxyl derivative according to the present invention is a compound represented by the general formula (M5).
前記一般式(M5)において、Rm51からRm55は各々独立に置換基を有しても良い脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基、または複素環基を表すが、これら脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基、複素環基については、一般式(M1)におけるそれぞれと同義である。 In the general formula (M5), Rm 51 to Rm 55 each independently represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, or a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent, and these aliphatic hydrocarbons The group, aromatic hydrocarbon group, and heterocyclic group have the same meanings as those in formula (M1).
一般式(M5)において、Rm51は芳香族炭化水素基が好ましく、特に置換基を有しても良いフェニル基が好ましい。フェニル基上の置換基としてはシアノ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、トリフルオロメチル基等の電子吸引性基が好ましい。Rm52からRm55としては、炭素数1~6のアルキル基が好ましく、メチル基が特に好ましい。 In the general formula (M5), Rm 51 is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group, particularly preferably a phenyl group which may have a substituent. The substituent on the phenyl group is preferably an electron-withdrawing group such as a cyano group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, or a trifluoromethyl group. As Rm 52 to Rm 55 , an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is preferable, and a methyl group is particularly preferable.
上記一般式(M6)において、Rm61及びRm62は各々独立に水素原子若しくは置換基を有しても良い脂肪族炭化水素基を表し、Z3、Z4及びZ5は環状構造を形成するのに必要な原子群を表し、nは0または1を表す。 In the general formula (M6), Rm 61 and Rm 62 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent, and Z 3 , Z 4 and Z 5 form a cyclic structure. And n represents 0 or 1.
一般式(M6)において、Rm61及びRm62は各々独立に水素原子若しくは置換基を有しても良い脂肪族炭化水素基を表すが、Rm61及びRm62としては水素原子若しくは、炭素数4以下の直鎖アルキル基が好ましく、Rm61及びRm62の少なくとも一方が水素原子であることが好ましい。
In formula (M6), represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may have a hydrogen atom or a substituent each independently Rm 61 and Rm 62, as the Rm 61 and Rm 62 or a hydrogen atom,
Z3、Z4及びZ5は各々環状構造を形成するのに必要な原子群(例えば炭素、窒素、酸素、イオウ等)を表し、各々5員環若しくは6員環を形成するのが好ましい。Z3、Z4及びZ5は更に置換基を有していても良い。 Z 3 , Z 4 and Z 5 each represent an atomic group necessary for forming a cyclic structure (for example, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, etc.), and each preferably forms a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring. Z 3 , Z 4 and Z 5 may further have a substituent.
nは0または1を表すが、n=0の時、一般式(M6)はビシクロ化合物を表し、n=1の場合トリシクロ化合物を表す。 N represents 0 or 1, but when n = 0, the general formula (M6) represents a bicyclo compound, and when n = 1, a tricyclo compound.
一般式(M6)で表される化合物としては、n=1が好ましく、特にアザアダマンタン誘導体が好ましい。 As the compound represented by the general formula (M6), n = 1 is preferable, and an azaadamantane derivative is particularly preferable.
以下に、本発明で用いることのできるプロモーターの具体例を示すが、これらに限定されるものでは無い。 Specific examples of promoters that can be used in the present invention are shown below, but are not limited thereto.
〔溶媒〕
本発明に係る電解質には、溶媒として、一般に電気化学セルや電池に用いられ、電気化学的な酸化還元反応により可逆的に溶解析出する金属塩化合物、プロモーター等各種添加剤を溶解できる溶媒を使用することができる。
〔solvent〕
In the electrolyte according to the present invention, a solvent that is generally used in electrochemical cells and batteries and that can dissolve various additives such as metal salt compounds and promoters that are reversibly dissolved and precipitated by an electrochemical redox reaction is used as a solvent. can do.
具体的には、無水酢酸、メタノール、エタノール、テトラヒドロフラン、エチレンカーボネート、エチルメチルカーボネート、ジエチルカーボネート、ジメチルカーボネート、ブチレンカーボネート、プロピレンカーボネート、ニトロメタン、アセトニトリル、アセチルアセトン、N-メチルホルムアミド、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド、ジメチルスルホキシド、ヘキサメチルホスホアミド、ジメトキシエタン、ジエトキシフラン、γ-ブチロラクトン、γ-バレロラクトン、スルホラン、プロピオニトリル、ブチロニトリル、グルタロニトリル、アジポニトリル、メトキシアセトニトリル、N-メチルアセトアミド、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド、N-メチルプロピオンアミド、メチルピロリジノン、2-(N-メチル)-2-ピロリジノン、ジメチルスルホキシド、ジオキソラン、トリメチルホスフェート、トリエチルホスフェート、トリプロピルホスフェート、エチルジメチルホスフェート、トリブチルホスフェート、トリペンチルホスフェート、トリヘキシルホスフェート、トリヘプチルホスフェート、トリオクチルホスフェート、トリノニルホスフェート、トリデシルホスフェート、トリス(トリフフロロメチル)ホスフェート、トリス(ペンタフロロエチル)ホスフェート、トリフェニルホスフェート、トリクレジルホスフェート、2-エチルヘキシルホスフェート、テトラメチル尿素、1,3-ジメチル-2-イミダゾリジノン、ヘキサメチルホスホルトリアミド、4-メチル-2-ペンタノン、ジオクチルフタレート、ジオクチルセバケート、及びエチレングリコール、ジエチレングリコール、トリエチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル等のポリエチレングリコール類などが使用可能である。 Specifically, acetic anhydride, methanol, ethanol, tetrahydrofuran, ethylene carbonate, ethyl methyl carbonate, diethyl carbonate, dimethyl carbonate, butylene carbonate, propylene carbonate, nitromethane, acetonitrile, acetylacetone, N-methylformamide, N, N-dimethylformamide , Dimethyl sulfoxide, hexamethylphosphoamide, dimethoxyethane, diethoxyfuran, γ-butyrolactone, γ-valerolactone, sulfolane, propionitrile, butyronitrile, glutaronitrile, adiponitrile, methoxyacetonitrile, N-methylacetamide, N, N -Dimethylacetamide, N-methylpropionamide, methylpyrrolidinone, 2- (N-methyl) -2-pyrrole Dinone, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxolane, trimethyl phosphate, triethyl phosphate, tripropyl phosphate, ethyl dimethyl phosphate, tributyl phosphate, tripentyl phosphate, trihexyl phosphate, triheptyl phosphate, trioctyl phosphate, trinonyl phosphate, tridecyl phosphate, tris ( Trifluoromethyl) phosphate, tris (pentafluoroethyl) phosphate, triphenyl phosphate, tricresyl phosphate, 2-ethylhexyl phosphate, tetramethylurea, 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinone, hexamethylphosphotriamide, 4-methyl-2-pentanone, dioctyl phthalate, dioctyl sebacate, and ethylene glycol Call, diethylene glycol, polyethylene glycols such as triethylene glycol monobutyl ether and the like can be used.
さらに、常温溶融塩も溶媒として使用可能である。前記常温溶融塩とは、溶媒成分が含まれないイオン対のみからなる常温において溶融している、即ち液状のイオン対からなる塩であり、通常、融点が20℃以下であり、20℃を越える温度で液状であるイオン対からなる塩を示す。常温溶融塩はその1種を単独で使用することができ、また2種以上を混合しても使用することもできる。 Furthermore, room temperature molten salt can also be used as a solvent. The normal temperature molten salt is a salt that is melted at normal temperature consisting of only ion pairs that do not contain a solvent component, that is, a salt consisting of liquid ion pairs. The salt which consists of an ion pair which is liquid at temperature is shown. The room temperature molten salt can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
本発明に用いる電解質溶媒としては、非プロトン性極性溶媒が好ましく、特にプロピレンカーボネート、エチレンカーボネート、ジメチルスルホキシド、ジメトキシエタン、アセトニトリル、γ-ブチロラクトン、スルホラン、ジオキソラン、ジメチルホルムアミド、ジメトキシエタン、テトラヒドロフラン、アジポニトリル、メトキシアセトニトリル、ジメチルアセトアミド、メチルピロリジノン、ジメチルスルホキシド、ジオキソラン、スルホラン、トリメチルホスフェート、トリエチルホスフェートが好ましい。溶媒はその1種を単独で使用しても良いし、また2種以上を混合して使用しても良い。 The electrolyte solvent used in the present invention is preferably an aprotic polar solvent, particularly propylene carbonate, ethylene carbonate, dimethyl sulfoxide, dimethoxyethane, acetonitrile, γ-butyrolactone, sulfolane, dioxolane, dimethylformamide, dimethoxyethane, tetrahydrofuran, adiponitrile, Methoxyacetonitrile, dimethylacetamide, methylpyrrolidinone, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxolane, sulfolane, trimethyl phosphate and triethyl phosphate are preferred. The solvent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
〈一般式(S1)、(S2)で表される化合物〉
本発明において、特に好ましく用いられる溶媒は、下記一般式(S1)または(S2)で表される化合物である。
<Compounds Represented by General Formulas (S1) and (S2)>
In the present invention, particularly preferably used solvents are compounds represented by the following general formula (S1) or (S2).
上記一般式(S1)において、Lは酸素原子またはアルキレン基を表し、Rs11からRs14は各々水素原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、シクロアルキル基、アルコキシアルキル基またはアルコキシ基を表す。 In the general formula (S1), L represents an oxygen atom or an alkylene group, and Rs 11 to Rs 14 each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, or an alkoxy group.
一般式(S2)において、Rs21,Rs22は各々アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、シクロアルキル基、アルコキシアルキル基またはアルコキシ基を表す。 In the general formula (S2), Rs 21 and Rs 22 each represents an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, or an alkoxy group.
はじめに、一般式(S1)で表される化合物の詳細について説明する。 First, the details of the compound represented by the general formula (S1) will be described.
前記一般式(S1)において、Lは酸素原子またはCH2を表し、Rs11からRs14は各々水素原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、シクロアルキル基、アルコキシアルキル基またはアルコキシ基を表し、これらの置換基は更に任意の置換基で置換されていても良い。 In the general formula (S1), L represents an oxygen atom or CH 2 , and Rs 11 to Rs 14 each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, or an alkoxy group, These substituents may be further substituted with an arbitrary substituent.
アルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、tert-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、オクチル基、ドデシル基、トリデシル基、テトラデシル基、ペンタデシル基等、アリール基としては、例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基等、シクロアルキル基としては、例えば、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基等、アルコキシアルキル基として、例えば、β-メトキシエチル基、γ-メトキシプロピル基等、アルコキシ基としては、例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロピルオキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、オクチルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基等を挙げることができる。 Examples of the alkyl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a tert-butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, an octyl group, a dodecyl group, a tridecyl group, a tetradecyl group, and a pentadecyl group. Examples of the cycloalkyl group such as phenyl group, naphthyl group, etc. include, for example, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, etc., alkoxyalkyl groups, such as β-methoxyethyl group, γ-methoxypropyl group, etc. Examples thereof include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propyloxy group, a pentyloxy group, a hexyloxy group, an octyloxy group, and a dodecyloxy group.
以下、一般式(S1)で表される化合物の具体例を示すが、本発明ではこれら例示する化合物にのみ限定されるものではない。 Hereinafter, although the specific example of a compound represented by general formula (S1) is shown, in this invention, it is not limited only to these illustrated compounds.
次いで、本発明に係る一般式(S2)で表される化合物の詳細について説明する。 Next, details of the compound represented by the general formula (S2) according to the present invention will be described.
前記一般式(S2)において、Rs21,Rs22は各々水素原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、シクロアルキル基、アルコキシアルキル基またはアルコキシ基を表す。 In the general formula (S2), Rs 21 and Rs 22 each represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, or an alkoxy group.
アルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、tert-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、オクチル基、ドデシル基、トリデシル基、テトラデシル基、ペンタデシル基等、アリール基としては、例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基等、シクロアルキル基としては、例えば、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基等、アルコキシアルキル基として、例えば、β-メトキシエチル基、γ-メトキシプロピル基等、アルコキシ基としては、例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロピルオキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、オクチルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基等を挙げることができる。 Examples of the alkyl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a tert-butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, an octyl group, a dodecyl group, a tridecyl group, a tetradecyl group, and a pentadecyl group. Examples of the cycloalkyl group such as phenyl group, naphthyl group, etc. include, for example, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, etc., alkoxyalkyl groups, such as β-methoxyethyl group, γ-methoxypropyl group, etc. Examples thereof include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propyloxy group, a pentyloxy group, a hexyloxy group, an octyloxy group, and a dodecyloxy group.
以下、一般式(S2)で表される化合物の具体例を示すが、本発明ではこれら例示する化合物にのみ限定されるものではない。 Hereinafter, although the specific example of a compound represented by general formula (S2) is shown, in this invention, it is not limited only to these illustrated compounds.
上記例示した一般式(S1)及び一般式(S2)で表される化合物の中でも、特に、例示化合物(S1-1)、(S1-2)、(S2-3)が好ましい。 Among the compounds represented by the general formulas (S1) and (S2) exemplified above, the exemplary compounds (S1-1), (S1-2), and (S2-3) are particularly preferable.
本発明に係る一般式(S1)、(S2)で表される化合物は電解質溶媒の1種であるが、本発明の表示素子においては、本発明の目的効果を損なわない範囲でさらに別の溶媒を併せて用いることができる。具体的には、テトラメチル尿素、スルホラン、ジメチルスルホキシド、1,3-ジメチル-2-イミダゾリジノン、2-(N-メチル)-2-ピロリジノン、ヘキサメチルホスホルトリアミド、N-メチルプロピオンアミド、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド、N-メチルアセトアミド、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド、N-メチルホルムアミド、ブチロニトリル、プロピオニトリル、アセトニトリル、アセチルアセトン、4-メチル-2-ペンタノン、2-ブタノール、1-ブタノール、2-プロパノール、1-プロパノール、エタノール、メタノール、無水酢酸、酢酸エチル、プロピオン酸エチル、ジメトキシエタン、ジエトキシフラン、テトラヒドロフラン、エチレングリコール、ジエチレングリコール、トリエチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル、水等が挙げられる。これらの溶媒の内、凝固点が-20℃以下、かつ沸点が120℃以上の溶媒を少なくとも1種含むことが好ましい。 The compounds represented by the general formulas (S1) and (S2) according to the present invention are one type of electrolyte solvent. However, in the display element of the present invention, another solvent is used as long as the object effects of the present invention are not impaired. Can be used together. Specifically, tetramethylurea, sulfolane, dimethyl sulfoxide, 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinone, 2- (N-methyl) -2-pyrrolidinone, hexamethylphosphortriamide, N-methylpropionamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, N-methylacetamide, N, N-dimethylformamide, N-methylformamide, butyronitrile, propionitrile, acetonitrile, acetylacetone, 4-methyl-2-pentanone, 2-butanol, 1-butanol, 2-propanol, 1-propanol, ethanol, methanol, acetic anhydride, ethyl acetate, ethyl propionate, dimethoxyethane, diethoxyfuran, tetrahydrofuran, ethylene glycol, diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol monobutyl Ether, water and the like. Among these solvents, it is preferable to include at least one solvent having a freezing point of −20 ° C. or lower and a boiling point of 120 ° C. or higher.
さらに本発明で用いることのできる溶媒としては、J.A.Riddick,W.B.Bunger,T.K.Sakano,“Organic Solvents”,4th ed.,John Wiley & Sons(1986)、Y.Marcus,“Ion Solvation”,John Wiley & Sons(1985)、C.Reichardt,“Solvents and Solvent Effects in Chemistry”,2nd ed.,VCH(1988)、G.J.Janz,R.P.T.Tomkins,“Nonaqueous Electrolytes Handbook”,Vol.1,Academic Press(1972)に記載の化合物を挙げることができる。 Further, examples of the solvent that can be used in the present invention include J.M. A. Riddick, W.M. B. Bunger, T.A. K. Sakano, “Organic Solvents”, 4th ed. , John Wiley & Sons (1986). Marcus, “Ion Solvation”, John Wiley & Sons (1985), C.I. Reichardt, “Solvents and Solvent Effects in Chemistry”, 2nd ed. VCH (1988), G .; J. et al. Janz, R.A. P. T.A. Tomkins, “Nonequeous Electrolytes Handbook”, Vol. 1, Academic Press (1972).
本発明において、電解質溶媒は単一種であっても、溶媒の混合物であってもよいが、エチレンカーボネートを含む混合溶媒が好ましい。エチレンカーボネートの添加量は、全電解質溶媒質量の10質量%以上、90質量%以下が好ましい。特に好ましい電解質溶媒は、プロピレンカーボネート/エチレンカーボネートの質量比が7/3~3/7の混合溶媒である。プロピレンカーボネート比が7/3より大きいとイオン伝導性が劣り応答速度が低下し、3/7より小さいと低温時に電解質が析出しやすくなる。 In the present invention, the electrolyte solvent may be a single kind or a mixture of solvents, but a mixed solvent containing ethylene carbonate is preferable. The addition amount of ethylene carbonate is preferably 10% by mass or more and 90% by mass or less of the total electrolyte solvent mass. A particularly preferable electrolyte solvent is a mixed solvent having a mass ratio of propylene carbonate / ethylene carbonate of 7/3 to 3/7. When the propylene carbonate ratio is larger than 7/3, the ionic conductivity is inferior and the response speed is lowered. When the propylene carbonate ratio is smaller than 3/7, the electrolyte tends to be deposited at a low temperature.
〔多孔質白色散乱層〕
本発明においては、表示コントラスト及び白表示反射率をより高める観点から、白色散乱性物質を含有する多孔質白色散乱層を有することができる。
(Porous white scattering layer)
In the present invention, it is possible to have a porous white scattering layer containing a white scattering material from the viewpoint of further increasing display contrast and white display reflectance.
本発明に適用可能な多孔質白色散乱層は、電解質溶媒に実質的に溶解しない水系高分子と白色顔料との水混和物を塗布乾燥して形成することができる。 The porous white scattering layer applicable to the present invention can be formed by applying and drying a water mixture of a water-based polymer and a white pigment that is substantially insoluble in the electrolyte solvent.
本発明でいう電解質溶媒に実質的に溶解しないとは、-20℃から120℃の温度において、電解質溶媒1kgあたりの溶解量が0g以上、10g以下である状態と定義し、質量測定法、液体クロマトグラムやガスクロマトグラムによる成分定量法等の公知の方法により溶解量を求めることができる。 The term “substantially insoluble in the electrolyte solvent” as used in the present invention is defined as a state where the dissolved amount per kg of electrolyte solvent is 0 g or more and 10 g or less at a temperature of −20 ° C. to 120 ° C. The amount of dissolution can be determined by a known method such as a component determination method using a chromatogram or a gas chromatogram.
本発明において、電解質溶媒に実質的に溶解しない水系高分子としては、水溶性高分子、水系溶媒に分散した高分子を挙げることができる。 In the present invention, examples of the water-based polymer that is substantially insoluble in the electrolyte solvent include a water-soluble polymer and a polymer dispersed in the water-based solvent.
水溶性高分子としては、ゼラチン、ゼラチン誘導体等の蛋白質またはセルロース誘導体、澱粉、アラビアゴム、デキストラン、プルラン、カラギーナン等の多糖類のような天然化合物や、ポリビニルアルコール、ポリエチレングリコール、ポリビニルピロリドン、アクリルアミド重合体やそれらの誘導体等の合成高分子化合物が挙げられる。ゼラチン誘導体としては、アセチル化ゼラチン、フタル化ゼラチン、ポリビニルアルコール誘導体としては、末端アルキル基変性ポリビニルアルコール、末端メルカプト基変性ポリビニルアルコール、セルロース誘導体としては、ヒドロキシエチルセルロース、ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース、カルボキシメチルセルロース等が挙げられる。更に、リサーチ・ディスクロージャー及び特開昭64-13546号の(71)頁~(75)頁に記載されたもの、また、米国特許第4,960,681号、特開昭62-245260号等に記載の高吸水性ポリマー、すなわち-COOMまたは-SO3M(Mは水素原子またはアルカリ金属)を有するビニルモノマーの単独重合体またはこのビニルモノマー同士もしくは他のビニルモノマー(例えばメタクリル酸ナトリウム、メタクリル酸アンモニウム、アクリル酸カリウム等)との共重合体も使用される。これらのバインダは2種以上組み合わせて用いることもできる。 Examples of water-soluble polymers include proteins such as gelatin and gelatin derivatives, or cellulose derivatives, natural compounds such as starch, gum arabic, dextran, pullulan, and carrageenan, and other natural compounds such as polyvinyl alcohol, polyethylene glycol, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, and acrylamide. Synthetic polymer compounds such as coalescence and derivatives thereof may be mentioned. Examples of gelatin derivatives include acetylated gelatin, phthalated gelatin, polyvinyl alcohol derivatives include terminal alkyl group-modified polyvinyl alcohol, terminal mercapto group-modified polyvinyl alcohol, and cellulose derivatives include hydroxyethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose, and the like. It is done. Further, Research Disclosure and those described in pages (71) to (75) of JP-A No. 64-13546, US Pat. No. 4,960,681, JP-A No. 62-245260, etc. Homopolymers of vinyl monomers having the described superabsorbent polymers, ie —COOM or —SO 3 M (M is a hydrogen atom or an alkali metal), or between these vinyl monomers or other vinyl monomers (eg sodium methacrylate, methacrylic acid) Copolymers with ammonium, potassium acrylate, etc.) are also used. These binders can be used in combination of two or more.
本発明においては、ポリビニルアルコール、ポリエチレングリコール、ポリビニルピロリドン系化合物を好ましく用いることができる。 In the present invention, polyvinyl alcohol, polyethylene glycol, and polyvinylpyrrolidone compounds can be preferably used.
水系溶媒に分散した高分子としては、天然ゴムラテックス、スチレンブタジエンゴム、ブタジエンゴム、ニトリルゴム、クロロプレンゴム、イソプレンゴム等のラテックス類、ポリイソシアネート系、エポキシ系、アクリル系、シリコン系、ポリウレタン系、尿素系、フェノール系、ホルムアルデヒド系、エポキシ-ポリアミド系、メラミン系、アルキド系樹脂、ビニル系樹脂等を水系溶媒に分散した熱硬化性樹脂を挙げることができる。これらの高分子のうち、特開平10-76621号に記載の水系ポリウレタン樹脂を用いることが好ましい。 Polymers dispersed in an aqueous solvent include latexes such as natural rubber latex, styrene butadiene rubber, butadiene rubber, nitrile rubber, chloroprene rubber, isoprene rubber, polyisocyanate, epoxy, acrylic, silicon, polyurethane, Examples thereof include a thermosetting resin in which urea, phenol, formaldehyde, epoxy-polyamide, melamine, alkyd resin, vinyl resin and the like are dispersed in an aqueous solvent. Of these polymers, the water-based polyurethane resin described in JP-A-10-76621 is preferably used.
本発明において、水系高分子の平均分子量は、重量平均で10,000~2,000,000の範囲が好ましく、より好ましくは30,000~500,000の範囲である。 In the present invention, the average molecular weight of the water-based polymer is preferably in the range of 10,000 to 2,000,000, more preferably in the range of 30,000 to 500,000 in terms of weight average.
本発明で適用可能な白色顔料としては、例えば、二酸化チタン(アナターゼ型あるいはルチル型)、硫酸バリウム、炭酸カルシウム、酸化アルミニウム、酸化亜鉛、酸化マグネシウムおよび水酸化亜鉛、水酸化マグネシウム、リン酸マグネシウム、リン酸水素マグネシウム、アルカリ土類金属塩、タルク、カオリン、ゼオライト、酸性白土、ガラス、有機化合物としてポリエチレン、ポリスチレン、アクリル樹脂、アイオノマー、エチレン-酢酸ビニル共重合樹脂、ベンゾグアナミン樹脂、尿素-ホルマリン樹脂、メラミン-ホルマリン樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂などが単体または複合混合で、または粒子中に屈折率を変化させるボイドを有する状態で使用されてもよい。 Examples of the white pigment applicable in the present invention include titanium dioxide (anatase type or rutile type), barium sulfate, calcium carbonate, aluminum oxide, zinc oxide, magnesium oxide and zinc hydroxide, magnesium hydroxide, magnesium phosphate, Magnesium hydrogen phosphate, alkaline earth metal salt, talc, kaolin, zeolite, acid clay, glass, organic compounds such as polyethylene, polystyrene, acrylic resin, ionomer, ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer resin, benzoguanamine resin, urea-formalin resin, A melamine-formalin resin, a polyamide resin, or the like may be used alone or in combination, or in a state having voids that change the refractive index in the particles.
本発明では、上記白色顔料の中でも、二酸化チタンが好ましく用いられ、特に無機酸化物(Al2O3、AlO(OH)、SiO2等)で表面処理した二酸化チタン、これらの表面処理に加えてトリメチロールエタン、トリエタノールアミン酢酸塩、トリメチルシクロシラン等の有機物処理を施した二酸化チタンがより好ましく用いられる。 In the present invention, among the above white pigments, titanium dioxide is preferably used. In particular, titanium dioxide surface-treated with an inorganic oxide (Al 2 O 3 , AlO (OH), SiO 2, etc.), in addition to these surface treatments. Titanium dioxide that has been treated with an organic substance such as trimethylolethane, triethanolamine acetate, or trimethylcyclosilane is more preferably used.
これらの白色顔料のうち、高温時の着色防止、屈折率に起因する素子の反射率の観点から、酸化チタンまたは酸化亜鉛を用いることがより好ましい。 Of these white pigments, it is more preferable to use titanium oxide or zinc oxide from the viewpoint of preventing coloring at high temperatures and the reflectance of the element due to the refractive index.
本発明において、水系化合物と白色顔料との水混和物は、公知の分散方法に従って白色顔料が水中分散された形態が好ましい。水系化合物/白色顔料の混合比は、容積比で1~0.01が好ましく、より好ましくは、0.3~0.05の範囲である。 In the present invention, the water admixture of the water-based compound and the white pigment is preferably in a form in which the white pigment is dispersed in water according to a known dispersion method. The mixing ratio of the aqueous compound / white pigment is preferably 1 to 0.01 by volume, more preferably 0.3 to 0.05.
多孔質白色散乱層の膜厚は、5~50μmの範囲であることが好ましく、より好ましくは10~30μmの範囲である。 The film thickness of the porous white scattering layer is preferably in the range of 5 to 50 μm, more preferably in the range of 10 to 30 μm.
溶剤としては、メタノール、エタノール、イソプロパノール等の水との溶解性が高いアルコール系溶剤が好ましく用いられ、水/アルコール系溶剤との混合比は、質量比で0.5~20の範囲が好ましく、より好ましくは2~10の範囲である。 As the solvent, an alcohol solvent having high solubility in water such as methanol, ethanol, isopropanol is preferably used, and the mixing ratio of water / alcohol solvent is preferably in the range of 0.5 to 20 by mass ratio. More preferably, it is in the range of 2-10.
本発明において、水系化合物と白色顔料との水混和物を塗布する媒体は、表示素子の対向電極間の構成要素上であればいずれの位置でもよいが、観察側から最も遠いエレクトロクロミック発色層に付与することが好ましい。 In the present invention, the medium for applying the water mixture of the water-based compound and the white pigment may be any position as long as it is on the constituent element between the counter electrodes of the display element, but the electrochromic coloring layer farthest from the observation side. It is preferable to give.
媒体への付与の方法としては、例えば、塗布方式、液噴霧方式、気相を介する噴霧方式として、圧電素子の振動を利用して液滴を飛翔させる方式、例えば、ピエゾ方式のインクジェットヘッドや、突沸を利用したサーマルヘッドを用いて液滴を飛翔させるバブルジェット(登録商標)方式のインクジェットヘッド、また空気圧や液圧により液を噴霧するスプレー方式等が挙げられる。 As a method for applying to a medium, for example, a coating method, a liquid spraying method, a spraying method via a gas phase, a method of flying droplets using vibration of a piezoelectric element, for example, a piezoelectric inkjet head, Examples thereof include a bubble jet (registered trademark) type ink jet head that causes droplets to fly using a thermal head that uses bumping, and a spray type that sprays liquid by air pressure or liquid pressure.
塗布方式としては、公知の塗布方式より適宜選択することができる。例えば、エアードクターコーター、ブレードコーター、ロッドコーター、ナイフコーター、スクイズコーター、含浸コーター、リバースローラーコーター、トランスファーローラーコーター、カーテンコーター、ダブルローラーコーター、スライドホッパーコーター、グラビアコーター、キスロールコーター、ビードコーター、キャストコーター、スプレイコーター、カレンダーコーター、押し出しコーター等が挙げられる。 The coating method can be appropriately selected from known coating methods. For example, air doctor coater, blade coater, rod coater, knife coater, squeeze coater, impregnation coater, reverse roller coater, transfer roller coater, curtain coater, double roller coater, slide hopper coater, gravure coater, kiss roll coater, bead coater, Examples include cast coaters, spray coaters, calendar coaters, and extrusion coaters.
媒体上に付与した水系化合物と白色顔料との水混和物の乾燥は、水を蒸発できる方法であればいかなる方法であってもよい。例えば、熱源からの加熱、赤外光を用いた加熱法、電磁誘導による加熱法等が挙げられる。また、水蒸発は減圧下で行ってもよい。 The drying of the water mixture of the aqueous compound and the white pigment applied on the medium may be performed by any method as long as it can evaporate water. For example, heating from a heat source, a heating method using infrared light, a heating method using electromagnetic induction, and the like can be given. Further, water evaporation may be performed under reduced pressure.
本発明でいう多孔質とは、前記水系化合物と白色顔料との水混和物を電極上に塗布乾燥して多孔質の白色散乱物を形成した後、該散乱物上に、銀または銀を化学構造中に含む化合物を含有する電解質液を与えた後に対向電極で挟み込み、対向電極間に電位差を与え、銀の溶解析出反応を生じさせることが可能で、イオン種が電極間で移動可能な貫通状態のことを言う。 Porous as used in the present invention refers to the formation of a porous white scattering material by applying a water admixture of the water-based compound and the white pigment onto the electrode and drying it, and then the silver or silver is chemically treated on the scattering material. After supplying an electrolyte solution containing the compound contained in the structure, it can be sandwiched between opposing electrodes, giving a potential difference between the opposing electrodes, causing a silver dissolution precipitation reaction, and penetrating ions that can move between the electrodes Tell the state.
本発明の表示素子では、上記説明した水混和物を塗布乾燥中または乾燥後に、硬膜剤により水系化合物の硬化反応を行うことが望ましい。 In the display element of the present invention, it is desirable to carry out a curing reaction of the aqueous compound with a hardener during or after applying and drying the water mixture described above.
本発明で用いられる硬膜剤の例としては、例えば、米国特許第4,678,739号の第41欄、同第4,791,042号、特開昭59-116655号、同62-245261号、同61-18942号、同61-249054号、同61-245153号、特開平4-218044号等に記載の硬膜剤が挙げられる。より具体的には、アルデヒド系硬膜剤(ホルムアルデヒド等)、アジリジン系硬膜剤、エポキシ系硬膜剤、ビニルスルホン系硬膜剤(N,N′-エチレン-ビス(ビニルスルホニルアセタミド)エタン等)、N-メチロール系硬膜剤(ジメチロール尿素等)、ほう酸、メタほう酸あるいは高分子硬膜剤(特開昭62-234157号等に記載の化合物)が挙げられる。水系化合物としてゼラチンを用いる場合は、硬膜剤の中で、ビニルスルホン型硬膜剤やクロロトリアジン型硬膜剤を単独または併用して使用することが好ましい。また、ポリビニルアルコールを用いる場合はホウ酸やメタホウ酸等の含ホウ素化合物の使用が好ましい。 Examples of hardeners used in the present invention include, for example, US Pat. No. 4,678,739, column 41, 4,791,042, JP-A-59-116655, and 62-245261. No. 61-18942, 61-249054, 61-245153, JP-A-4-218044, and the like. More specifically, aldehyde hardeners (formaldehyde, etc.), aziridine hardeners, epoxy hardeners, vinyl sulfone hardeners (N, N'-ethylene-bis (vinylsulfonylacetamide) Ethane, etc.), N-methylol hardeners (dimethylolurea, etc.), boric acid, metaboric acid or polymer hardeners (compounds described in JP-A-62-234157). When gelatin is used as the aqueous compound, it is preferable to use a vinyl sulfone type hardener or a chlorotriazine type hardener alone or in combination. Moreover, when using polyvinyl alcohol, it is preferable to use boron-containing compounds such as boric acid and metaboric acid.
これらの硬膜剤は、水系化合物1g当たり0.001~1g、好ましくは0.005~0.5gが用いられる。また、膜強度を上げるため熱処理や、硬化反応時の湿度調整を行うことも可能である。 These hardeners are used in an amount of 0.001 to 1 g, preferably 0.005 to 0.5 g, per 1 g of aqueous compound. In addition, it is possible to perform heat treatment and humidity adjustment during the curing reaction in order to increase the film strength.
〔電子絶縁層〕
本発明の表示素子においては、電子絶縁層を設けることができる。
(Electronic insulation layer)
In the display element of the present invention, an electronic insulating layer can be provided.
本発明に適用可能な電子絶縁層は、イオン電導性、電子絶縁性を合わせて有する層であればよく、例えば、極性基を有する高分子や塩をフィルム状にした固体電解質膜、電子絶縁性の高い多孔質膜とその空隙に電解質を担持する擬固体電解質膜、空隙を有する高分子多孔質膜、含ケイ素化合物の様な比誘電率が低い無機材料の多孔質膜等が挙げられる。 The electronic insulating layer applicable to the present invention may be a layer having both ionic conductivity and electronic insulating properties. For example, a solid electrolyte membrane in which a polymer or salt having a polar group is formed into a film, electronic insulating properties And a porous solid film having a low relative dielectric constant such as a silicon-containing compound, and the like.
多孔質膜の形成方法としては、燒結法(融着法)(高分子微粒子や無機粒子をバインダ等を添加して部分的に融着させ粒子間に生じた孔を利用する)、抽出法(溶剤に可溶な有機物又は無機物類と溶剤に溶解しないバインダ等で構成層を形成した後に、溶剤で有機物又は無機物類を溶解させ細孔を得る)、高分子重合体等を加熱や脱気するなどして発泡させる発泡法、良溶媒と貧溶媒を操作して高分子類の混合物を相分離させる相転換法、各種放射線を輻射して細孔を形成させる放射線照射法等の公知の形成方法を用いることができる。具体的な電気絶縁層としては、例えば、特開平10-30181号公報、特開2003-107626号公報、特公平7-95403号公報、特許第2635715号公報、同第2849523号公報、同第2987474号公報、同第3066426号公報、同第3464513号公報、同第3483644号公報、同第3535942号公報、同第3062203号公報等に記載の電子絶縁層を挙げることができる。 As a method for forming a porous film, a sintering method (fusing method) (using fine pores formed between particles by partially fusing polymer fine particles or inorganic particles by adding a binder, etc.), extraction method ( After forming a constituent layer with a solvent-soluble organic substance or inorganic substance and a binder that does not dissolve in the solvent, the organic substance or inorganic substance is dissolved with the solvent to obtain pores), and the polymer is heated or degassed Known forming methods such as a foaming method in which foaming is performed, a phase change method in which a mixture of polymers is phase-separated by operating a good solvent and a poor solvent, and a radiation irradiation method in which pores are formed by radiating various types of radiation Can be used. Specific examples of the electrical insulating layer include, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-30181, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-107626, Japanese Patent Publication No. 7-95403, Japanese Patent No. 2635715, Japanese Patent No. 2849523, and Japanese Patent No. 2987474. The electronic insulating layer described in JP-A No. 3066426, No. 3464513, No. 3482644, No. 3535942, No. 30622203, or the like can be given.
〔電解質添加の増粘剤〕
本発明の表示素子においては、電解質に増粘剤を使用することができ、例えば、ゼラチン、アラビアゴム、ポリ(ビニルアルコール)、ヒドロキシエチルセルロース、ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース、セルロースアセテート、セルロースアセテートブチレート、ポリ(ビニルピロリドン)、ポリ(アルキレングリコール)、カゼイン、デンプン、ポリ(アクリル酸)、ポリ(メチルメタクリル酸)、ポリ(塩化ビニル)、ポリ(メタクリル酸)、コポリ(スチレン-無水マレイン酸)、コポリ(スチレン-アクリロニトリル)、コポリ(スチレン-ブタジエン)、ポリ(ビニルアセタール)類(例えば、ポリ(ビニルホルマール)及びポリ(ビニルブチラール))、ポリ(エステル)類、ポリ(ウレタン)類、フェノキシ樹脂、ポリ(塩化ビニリデン)、ポリ(エポキシド)類、ポリ(カーボネート)類、ポリ(ビニルアセテート)、セルロースエステル類、ポリ(アミド)類、疎水性透明バインダとして、ポリビニルブチラール、セルロースアセテート、セルロースアセテートブチレート、ポリエステル、ポリカーボネート、ポリアクリル酸、ポリウレタン等が挙げられる。
[Thickener added with electrolyte]
In the display element of the present invention, a thickener can be used for the electrolyte. For example, gelatin, gum arabic, poly (vinyl alcohol), hydroxyethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, cellulose acetate, cellulose acetate butyrate, poly ( Vinylpyrrolidone), poly (alkylene glycol), casein, starch, poly (acrylic acid), poly (methyl methacrylic acid), poly (vinyl chloride), poly (methacrylic acid), copoly (styrene-maleic anhydride), copoly ( Styrene-acrylonitrile), copoly (styrene-butadiene), poly (vinyl acetal) s (eg, poly (vinyl formal) and poly (vinyl butyral)), poly (esters), poly (urethanes), phenoxy resins, poly (PVC Redene), poly (epoxide) s, poly (carbonates), poly (vinyl acetate), cellulose esters, poly (amides), hydrophobic transparent binders such as polyvinyl butyral, cellulose acetate, cellulose acetate butyrate, polyester, Examples include polycarbonate, polyacrylic acid, polyurethane and the like.
これらの増粘剤は2種以上を併用して用いてもよい。また、特開昭64-13546号公報の71~75頁に記載の化合物を挙げることができる。これらの中で好ましく用いられる化合物は、各種添加剤との相溶性と白色粒子の分散安定性向上の観点から、ポリビニルアルコール類、ポリビニルピロリドン類、ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース類、ポリアルキレングリコール類である。 These thickeners may be used in combination of two or more. Further, compounds described on pages 71 to 75 of JP-A No. 64-13546 can be exemplified. Among these, the compounds preferably used are polyvinyl alcohols, polyvinyl pyrrolidones, hydroxypropyl celluloses, and polyalkylene glycols from the viewpoint of compatibility with various additives and improvement in dispersion stability of white particles.
〔その他の添加剤〕
本発明の表示素子の電解質には、その他各種性能を向上させる目的の添加剤を使用することができる。それらは目的に応じて選択され、特に制限されるものではない。
[Other additives]
For the electrolyte of the display element of the present invention, other additives for the purpose of improving various performances can be used. They are selected according to the purpose and are not particularly limited.
各種の化学増感剤、貴金属増感剤、感光色素、強色増感剤、カプラー、高沸点溶剤、カブリ防止剤、安定剤、現像抑制剤、漂白促進剤、定着促進剤、混色防止剤、ホルマリンスカベンジャー、色調剤、硬膜剤、界面活性剤、増粘剤、可塑剤、スベリ剤、紫外線吸収剤、イラジエーション防止染料、フィルター光吸収染料、防ばい剤、ポリマーラテックス、重金属、帯電防止剤、マット剤等を、必要に応じて含有させることができる。 Various chemical sensitizers, noble metal sensitizers, photosensitive dyes, supersensitizers, couplers, high boiling solvents, antifoggants, stabilizers, development inhibitors, bleach accelerators, fixing accelerators, color mixing inhibitors, Formalin Scavenger, Toning Agent, Hardener, Surfactant, Thickener, Plasticizer, Slipper, Ultraviolet Absorber, Irradiation Dye, Filter Light Absorbing Dye, Antibacterial Agent, Polymer Latex, Heavy Metal, Antistatic Agent Further, a matting agent or the like can be contained as necessary.
上述したこれらの添加剤は、より詳しくは、リサーチ・ディスクロージャー(以下、RDと略す)第176巻Item/17643(1978年12月)、同184巻Item/18431(1979年8月)、同187巻Item/18716(1979年11月)及び同308巻Item/308119(1989年12月)に記載されている。 These additives mentioned above are more specifically described in Research Disclosure (hereinafter abbreviated as RD), Volume 176 Item / 17643 (December 1978), Volume 184, Item / 18431 (August 1979), 187. Volume Item / 18716 (November 1979) and Volume 308 Item / 308119 (December 1989).
これら三つのリサーチ・ディスクロージャーに示されている化合物種類と記載箇所を以下に掲載した。 The types of compounds and their locations shown in these three research disclosures are listed below.
上記の添加剤は、保護層、フィルター層、ハレーション防止層、クロスオーバー光カット層、バッキング層等の補助層を設け、それら補助層中に含有させることも可能である。 The above-mentioned additives may be provided in auxiliary layers such as a protective layer, a filter layer, an antihalation layer, a crossover light cut layer, and a backing layer, and may be contained in these auxiliary layers.
〔基板〕
本発明の表示素子を構成する基板としては、透明基板であることが好ましく、このような透明基板としては、ポリエステル(例えば、ポリエチレンテレフタレート等)、ポリイミド、ポリメタクリル酸メチル、ポリスチレン、ポリプロピレン、ポリエチレン、ポリアミド、ナイロン、ポリ塩化ビニル、ポリ塩化ビニリデン、ポリカーボネート、ポリエーテルスルフォン、シリコン樹脂、ポリアセタール樹脂、フッ素樹脂、セルロース誘導体、ポリオレフィンなどの高分子のフィルムや板状基板、ガラス基板などが好ましく用いられる。本発明に用いられる透明な基板とは、可視光に対する透過率が少なくとも50%以上の基板をいう。また、対向基板としては、例えば、金属基板、セラミック基板等の無機基板など不透明な基板を用いることもできる。
〔substrate〕
The substrate constituting the display element of the present invention is preferably a transparent substrate. Examples of such a transparent substrate include polyester (for example, polyethylene terephthalate), polyimide, polymethyl methacrylate, polystyrene, polypropylene, polyethylene, Polyamide, nylon, polyvinyl chloride, polyvinylidene chloride, polycarbonate, polyether sulfone, silicon resin, polyacetal resin, fluororesin, cellulose derivative, polyolefin film, plate-like substrate, glass substrate and the like are preferably used. The transparent substrate used in the present invention refers to a substrate having a transmittance for visible light of at least 50%. Further, as the counter substrate, for example, an opaque substrate such as an inorganic substrate such as a metal substrate or a ceramic substrate can be used.
〔電極〕
(表示側電極)
表示側電極には、少なくとも可視光を透過する透明電極が用いられる。例えば、Indium Tin Oxide(ITO:インジウム錫酸化物)、Indium Zinc Oxide(IZO:インジウム亜鉛酸化物)、フッ素ドープ酸化スズ(FTO)、酸化インジウム、酸化亜鉛、白金、金、銀、ロジウム、銅、クロム、炭素、アルミニウム、シリコン、アモルファスシリコン、BSO(Bismuth Silicon Oxide)等が挙げられる。
〔electrode〕
(Display side electrode)
A transparent electrode that transmits at least visible light is used for the display-side electrode. For example, Indium Tin Oxide (ITO: Indium Tin Oxide), Indium Zinc Oxide (IZO: Indium Zinc Oxide), Fluorine Doped Tin Oxide (FTO), Indium Oxide, Zinc Oxide, Platinum, Gold, Silver, Rhodium, Copper, Examples thereof include chromium, carbon, aluminum, silicon, amorphous silicon, and BSO (Bismuth Silicon Oxide).
また、ポリチオフェン、ポリピロール、ポリアニリン、ポリアセチレン、ポリパラフェニレン、ポリセレノフェニレン等、およびそれらの修飾化合物を単独あるいは混合して用いることができる。 Also, polythiophene, polypyrrole, polyaniline, polyacetylene, polyparaphenylene, polyselenophenylene, etc., and their modifying compounds can be used alone or in combination.
表示側電極の導電性を示す表面抵抗値としては、100Ω/□以下が好ましく、10Ω/□以下がより好ましい。電極の厚みには特に制限はないが、0.1~20μmであるのが一般的である。 The surface resistance value indicating the conductivity of the display-side electrode is preferably 100Ω / □ or less, and more preferably 10Ω / □ or less. The thickness of the electrode is not particularly limited, but is generally 0.1 to 20 μm.
(透明多孔質電極)
表示側電極の表面に、ナノ多孔質構造を有するナノ多孔質電極を設けることができる。このナノ多孔質電極は、表示素子を形成した際に実質的に透明で、エレクトロクロミック色素等の電気活性物質を担持することができる。
(Transparent porous electrode)
A nanoporous electrode having a nanoporous structure can be provided on the surface of the display side electrode. This nanoporous electrode is substantially transparent when a display element is formed, and can carry an electroactive substance such as an electrochromic dye.
本発明でいうナノ多孔質構造とは、層中にナノメートルサイズの孔が無数に存在し、ナノ多孔質構造内を電解質中に含まれるイオン種が移動可能な状態のことを言う。 The nanoporous structure referred to in the present invention refers to a state in which an infinite number of nanometer-sized pores exist in a layer and ionic species contained in the electrolyte can move within the nanoporous structure.
このようなナノ多孔質電極の形成方法としては、ナノ多孔質電極を構成する微粒子を含んだ分散物をインクジェット法、スクリーン印刷法、ブレード塗布法などで層状に形成した後に、所定の温度で加熱、乾燥、焼成することよって多孔質化する方法や、スパッタ法、CVD法、大気圧プラズマ法などで電極層を構成した後に、陽極酸化、光電気化学エッチングすることによってナノ多孔質化する方法などが挙げられる。また、ゾルゲル法や、Adv.Mater.2006,18,2980-2983に記載された方法でも、形成することができる。 As a method for forming such a nanoporous electrode, a dispersion containing fine particles constituting the nanoporous electrode is formed in layers by an ink jet method, a screen printing method, a blade coating method, etc., and then heated at a predetermined temperature. A method of making porous by drying, baking, a method of making nanoporous by anodizing or photoelectrochemical etching after forming an electrode layer by sputtering, CVD, atmospheric pressure plasma, etc. Is mentioned. Also, the sol-gel method, Adv. Mater. It can also be formed by the method described in 2006, 18, 2980-2983.
ナノ多孔質電極を構成する微粒子の主成分は、Cu、Al、Pt、Ag、Pd、Au等の金属やITO、SnO2、TiO2、ZnO等の金属酸化物やカーボンナノチューブ、グラッシーカーボン、ダイヤモンドライクカーボン、窒素含有カーボン等の炭素電極から選択することができ、好ましくは、ITO、SnO2、TiO2、ZnO等の金属酸化物から選択されることである。 The main components of the fine particles constituting the nanoporous electrode are metals such as Cu, Al, Pt, Ag, Pd and Au, metal oxides such as ITO, SnO 2 , TiO 2 and ZnO, carbon nanotubes, glassy carbon, and diamond. It can be selected from carbon electrodes such as like carbon and nitrogen-containing carbon, and is preferably selected from metal oxides such as ITO, SnO 2 , TiO 2 , and ZnO.
ナノ多孔質電極が透明性を有するためには、平均粒子径が5nm~10μm程度の微粒子を用いることが好ましい。微粒子の形状は不定形、針状、球形など任意の形状のものを用いることができる。 In order for the nanoporous electrode to be transparent, it is preferable to use fine particles having an average particle diameter of about 5 nm to 10 μm. As the shape of the fine particles, those having an arbitrary shape such as an indefinite shape, a needle shape, and a spherical shape can be used.
ナノ多孔質電極の膜厚は、0.1~10μmの範囲であることが好ましく、より好ましくは0.25~5μmの範囲である。 The film thickness of the nanoporous electrode is preferably in the range of 0.1 to 10 μm, more preferably in the range of 0.25 to 5 μm.
(対向電極)
対向電極は、表示色に関与することなく用いることができるため、電気を通じるものであれば、特に制限されず用いることができる。
(Counter electrode)
Since the counter electrode can be used without being involved in the display color, it can be used without particular limitation as long as it conducts electricity.
表示側電極に用いられる材料と同じ材料に加え、白金、金、銀、銅、アルミニウム、亜鉛、ニッケル、チタン、ビスマスなどの金属およびそれらの合金、カーボン等、透明性を有しない材料でも好ましく用いることができる。 In addition to the same materials used for the display-side electrode, metals such as platinum, gold, silver, copper, aluminum, zinc, nickel, titanium, bismuth and their alloys, carbon, etc. are also preferably used. be able to.
(補助電極)
本発明に係る一対の対向する電極のうち少なくとも一方の電極に、補助電極を付帯させることができる。
(Auxiliary electrode)
An auxiliary electrode can be attached to at least one of the pair of opposing electrodes according to the present invention.
補助電極は、主となる電極部より電気抵抗が低い材料を用いることが好ましい。例えば、白金、金、銀、銅、アルミニウム、亜鉛、ニッケル、チタン、ビスマスなどの金属およびそれらの合金等を好ましく用いることができる。 The auxiliary electrode is preferably made of a material having a lower electrical resistance than the main electrode part. For example, metals such as platinum, gold, silver, copper, aluminum, zinc, nickel, titanium, and bismuth and alloys thereof can be preferably used.
補助電極は、主となる電極部と基板との間と、主となる電極部の基板と反対側の表面とのいずれに設置することもできる。いずれにしても、補助電極が主となる電極部と電気的に接続していればよい。 The auxiliary electrode can be installed either between the main electrode portion and the substrate, or on the surface of the main electrode portion opposite to the substrate. In any case, it is only necessary that the auxiliary electrode is electrically connected to the main electrode portion.
補助電極の配置パターンには、特に制限はない。直線状、メッシュ状、円形など、求められる性能に応じて適宜形成することが可能である。主となる電極部が複数の部分に分割されている場合には、分割された電極部同士を接続する形で設けてもよい。ただし、主となる電極部が表示側の基板に設けられた透明電極の場合、補助電極は、表示素子の視認性を阻害しない形状と頻度で設けることが求められる。 There is no particular limitation on the arrangement pattern of the auxiliary electrodes. It can be appropriately formed according to the required performance, such as linear, mesh, or circular. When the main electrode part is divided into a plurality of parts, the divided electrode parts may be connected to each other. However, in the case where the main electrode portion is a transparent electrode provided on the substrate on the display side, the auxiliary electrode is required to be provided with a shape and frequency that do not impair the visibility of the display element.
補助電極を形成する方法としては、公知の方法を用いることができる。例えば、フォトリソグラフィ法でパターニングする方法や、印刷法やインクジェット法、電解メッキや無電解メッキ、銀塩感光材料を用いて露光、現像処理してパターン形成する方法でも良い。本発明の補助電極パターンのライン幅やライン間隔は、任意の値で構わないが、導電性を高くするためにはライン幅を太くする必要がある。一方、透明電極に補助電極を付帯させる場合には、視認性の観点から、表示素子観察側から見た補助電極の面積被覆率は30%以下が好ましく、さらに好ましくは10%以下である。 As a method for forming the auxiliary electrode, a known method can be used. For example, a patterning method by photolithography, a printing method, an ink jet method, electrolytic plating or electroless plating, or a method of forming a pattern by exposing and developing using a silver salt photosensitive material may be used. Although the line width and line interval of the auxiliary electrode pattern of the present invention may be arbitrary values, it is necessary to increase the line width in order to increase the conductivity. On the other hand, when an auxiliary electrode is attached to the transparent electrode, from the viewpoint of visibility, the area coverage of the auxiliary electrode viewed from the display element observation side is preferably 30% or less, and more preferably 10% or less.
このように透過率と導電性の点から、補助電極のライン幅は1μm以上、100μm以下が好ましく、ライン間隔は50μmから1000μmが好ましい。 Thus, from the viewpoint of transmittance and conductivity, the line width of the auxiliary electrode is preferably 1 μm or more and 100 μm or less, and the line interval is preferably 50 μm to 1000 μm.
(電極の製法)
表示側電極および対抗電極(、補助電極)を形成するには、公知の方法を用いることができる。例えば、基板上にスパッタリング法等でマスク蒸着するか、全面形成した後に、フォトリソグラフィ法でパターニングしてもよい。
(Production method of electrodes)
A known method can be used to form the display-side electrode and the counter electrode (and auxiliary electrode). For example, mask deposition may be performed on the substrate by sputtering or the like, or patterning may be performed by photolithography after the entire surface is formed.
また、電解メッキや無電解メッキ、印刷法や、インクジェット法によっても電極形成が可能である。 Also, electrodes can be formed by electrolytic plating, electroless plating, printing methods, and ink jet methods.
インクジェット方式を用いて基板上にモノマー重合能を有する触媒層を含む電極パターンを形成した後に、該触媒により重合されて重合後に導電性高分子層になりうるモノマー成分を付与して、モノマー成分を重合し、さらに、該導電性高分子層の上に銀等の金属メッキを行うことにより金属電極パターンを形成することもでき、フォトレジストやマスクパターンを使用することがないので、工程を大幅に簡略化できる。 After forming an electrode pattern including a catalyst layer having a monomer polymerization ability on a substrate using an inkjet method, a monomer component that is polymerized by the catalyst and becomes a conductive polymer layer after polymerization is added, It is also possible to form a metal electrode pattern by polymerizing and further performing metal plating such as silver on the conductive polymer layer, and the process is greatly reduced because no photoresist or mask pattern is used. It can be simplified.
電極材料を塗布にて形成する場合は、ディッピング法、スピナー法、スプレー法、ロールコーター法、フレキソ印刷法、スクリーン印刷法等の公知の方法を用いることができる。 When the electrode material is formed by coating, known methods such as a dipping method, a spinner method, a spray method, a roll coater method, a flexographic printing method, and a screen printing method can be used.
インクジェット方式の中でも、下記の静電インクジェットは高粘度の液体を高精度に連続的に印字することが可能であり、本発明の透明電極や金属補助電極の形成に好ましく用いられる。インクの粘度は、好ましくは30mPa・s以上であり、更に好ましくは100mPa・s以上である。 Among the inkjet methods, the following electrostatic inkjet can print a highly viscous liquid continuously with high accuracy, and is preferably used for forming the transparent electrode and the metal auxiliary electrode of the present invention. The viscosity of the ink is preferably 30 mPa · s or more, and more preferably 100 mPa · s or more.
(静電インクジェット)
本発明の表示素子においては、複合電極の透明電極及び金属補助電極の少なくとも一方が、帯電した液体を吐出する内部直径が30μm以下のノズルを有する液体吐出ヘッドと、前記ノズル内に溶液を供給する供給手段と、前記ノズル内の溶液に吐出電圧を印加する吐出電圧印加手段とを備えた液体吐出装置を用いて形成されることが好ましい。
(Electrostatic inkjet)
In the display element of the present invention, at least one of the transparent electrode of the composite electrode and the metal auxiliary electrode supplies a liquid discharge head having a nozzle with an internal diameter of 30 μm or less for discharging charged liquid, and a solution into the nozzle. It is preferably formed using a liquid discharge apparatus including a supply unit and a discharge voltage application unit that applies a discharge voltage to the solution in the nozzle.
さらに前記ノズル内の溶液が当該ノズル先端部から凸状に盛り上がった状態を形成する凸状メニスカス形成手段を設けた吐出装置を用いて形成されることが好ましい。 Further, it is preferable that the solution in the nozzle is formed by using a discharge device provided with a convex meniscus forming means for forming a state where the solution rises in a convex shape from the nozzle tip.
また、前記凸状メニスカス形成手段を駆動する駆動電圧の印加及び吐出電圧印加手段による吐出電圧の印加を制御する動作制御手段を備え、この動作制御手段は、前記吐出電圧印加手段による吐出電圧の印加を行わせつつ液滴の吐出に際して前記凸状メニスカス形成手段の駆動電圧の印加を行わせる第一の吐出制御部を有する液体吐出装置を用いることも好ましい。 In addition, an operation control unit that controls application of a drive voltage for driving the convex meniscus forming unit and application of a discharge voltage by the discharge voltage application unit is provided, and the operation control unit applies the discharge voltage by the discharge voltage application unit. It is also preferable to use a liquid ejection apparatus having a first ejection control unit that applies a driving voltage to the convex meniscus forming means when ejecting liquid droplets while performing the above.
また、前記凸状メニスカス形成手段の駆動及び吐出電圧印加手段による電圧印加を制御する動作制御手段を備え、この動作制御手段は、前記凸状メニスカス形成手段による溶液の盛り上げ動作と前記吐出電圧の印加とを同期させて行う第二の吐出制御部を有することを特徴とする液体吐出装置を用いること、前記動作制御手段は、前記溶液の盛り上げ動作及び吐出電圧の印加の後に前記ノズル先端部の液面を内側に引き込ませる動作制御を行う液面安定化制御部を有する液体吐出装置を用いることも好ましい形態である。 In addition, an operation control unit that controls driving of the convex meniscus forming unit and voltage application by the discharge voltage applying unit is provided, and the operation control unit is configured to swell the solution by the convex meniscus forming unit and apply the discharge voltage. And a second discharge control unit that performs synchronization with the liquid discharge device, wherein the operation control means is configured to supply the liquid at the tip of the nozzle after the swell operation of the solution and the application of the discharge voltage. It is also a preferred form to use a liquid discharge apparatus having a liquid level stabilization control unit that performs operation control for drawing the surface inward.
この様な静電インクジェットを用いて電極パターンを作製することにより、オンデマンド性に優れ、廃棄材料が少なく、寸法精度に優れた電極を得ることができ有利である。 By producing an electrode pattern using such an electrostatic ink jet, it is advantageous that an electrode having excellent on-demand characteristics, little waste material, and excellent dimensional accuracy can be obtained.
〔表示素子のその他の構成要素〕
本発明の表示素子には、必要に応じて、シール剤、柱状構造物、スペーサー粒子を用いることができる。
[Other components of the display element]
In the display element of the present invention, a sealant, a columnar structure, and spacer particles can be used as necessary.
シール剤は外に漏れないように封入するためのものであり封止剤とも呼ばれ、エポキシ樹脂、ウレタン系樹脂、アクリル系樹脂、酢酸ビニル系樹脂、エン-チオール系樹脂、シリコン系樹脂、変性ポリマー樹脂等の、熱硬化型、光硬化型、湿気硬化型、嫌気硬化型等の硬化タイプを用いることができる。 Sealing agent is for sealing so that it does not leak to the outside and is also called sealing agent. Epoxy resin, urethane resin, acrylic resin, vinyl acetate resin, ene-thiol resin, silicon resin, modified resin A curing type such as a polymer resin, such as a thermosetting type, a photocurable type, a moisture curable type, and an anaerobic curable type can be used.
柱状構造物は、基板間の強い自己保持性(強度)を付与し、例えば、格子配列等の所定のパターンに一定の間隔で配列された、円柱状体、四角柱状体、楕円柱状体、台形柱状体等の柱状構造物を挙げることができる。また、所定間隔で配置されたストライプ状のものでもよい。この柱状構造物はランダムな配列ではなく、等間隔な配列、間隔が徐々に変化する配列、所定の配置パターンが一定の周期で繰り返される配列等、基板の間隔を適切に保持でき、且つ、画像表示を妨げないように考慮された配列であることが好ましい。柱状構造物は表示素子の表示領域に占める面積の割合が1~40%であれば、表示素子として実用上十分な強度が得られる。 The columnar structure provides strong self-holding (strength) between the substrates, for example, a columnar body, a quadrangular columnar body, an elliptical columnar body, a trapezoidal array arranged in a predetermined pattern such as a lattice arrangement. A columnar structure such as a columnar body can be given. Alternatively, stripes arranged at predetermined intervals may be used. This columnar structure is not a random array, but can be properly maintained at intervals of the substrate, such as an evenly spaced array, an array in which the interval gradually changes, and an array in which a predetermined arrangement pattern is repeated at a constant period. The arrangement is preferably considered so as not to disturb the display. If the ratio of the area occupied by the columnar structure to the display area of the display element is 1 to 40%, a practically sufficient strength as a display element can be obtained.
一対の基板間には、該基板間のギャップを均一に保持するためのスペーサーが設けられていてもよい。このスペーサーとしては、樹脂製または無機酸化物製の球体を例示できる。また、表面に熱可塑性の樹脂がコーティングしてある固着スペーサーも好適に用いられる。基板間のギャップを均一に保持するために柱状構造物のみを設けてもよいが、スペーサー及び柱状構造物をいずれも設けてもよいし、柱状構造物に代えて、スペーサーのみをスペース保持部材として使用してもよい。スペーサーの直径は柱状構造物を形成する場合はその高さ以下、好ましくは当該高さに等しい。柱状構造物を形成しない場合はスペーサーの直径がセルギャップの厚みに相当する。 A spacer may be provided between the pair of substrates for uniformly maintaining a gap between the substrates. Examples of the spacer include a sphere made of resin or inorganic oxide. Further, a fixed spacer having a surface coated with a thermoplastic resin is also preferably used. In order to hold the gap between the substrates uniformly, only the columnar structure may be provided, but both the spacer and the columnar structure may be provided, or instead of the columnar structure, only the spacer is used as the space holding member. May be used. The diameter of the spacer is equal to or less than the height of the columnar structure, preferably equal to the height. When the columnar structure is not formed, the spacer diameter corresponds to the cell gap thickness.
〔表示素子駆動方法〕
本発明の表示素子の駆動操作は、単純マトリックス駆動であっても、アクティブマトリック駆動であってもよい。本発明でいう単純マトリックス駆動とは、複数の正極を含む正極ラインと複数の負極を含む負極ラインとが対向する形で互いのラインが垂直方向に交差した回路に、順次電流を印加する駆動方法のことを言う。単純マトリックス駆動を用いることにより、回路構成や駆動ICを簡略化でき安価に製造できるメリットがある。アクティブマトリックス駆動は、走査線、データライン、電流供給ラインが碁盤目状に形成され、各碁盤目に設けられたTFT回路により駆動させる方式である。画素毎にスイッチングが行えるので、階調やメモリー機能などのメリットがあり、例えば、特開2004-29327号公報の図5に記載されている回路を用いることができる。
[Display element driving method]
The driving operation of the display element of the present invention may be simple matrix driving or active matrix driving. The simple matrix driving in the present invention is a driving method in which a current is sequentially applied to a circuit in which a positive line including a plurality of positive electrodes and a negative electrode line including a plurality of negative electrodes are opposed to each other in a vertical direction. Say that. By using simple matrix driving, there is an advantage that the circuit configuration and driving IC can be simplified and manufactured at low cost. The active matrix drive is a system in which scanning lines, data lines, and current supply lines are formed in a grid pattern, and are driven by TFT circuits provided in each grid pattern. Since switching can be performed for each pixel, there are merits such as gradation and memory function. For example, a circuit described in FIG. 5 of JP-A-2004-29327 can be used.
〔商品適用〕
本発明の表示素子は、電子書籍分野、IDカード関連分野、公共関連分野、交通関連分野、放送関連分野、決済関連分野、流通物流関連分野等の用いることができる。具体的には、ドア用のキー、学生証、社員証、各種会員カード、コンビニストアー用カード、デパート用カード、自動販売機用カード、ガソリンステーション用カード、地下鉄や鉄道用のカード、バスカード、キャッシュカード、クレジットカード、ハイウェイカード、運転免許証、病院の診察カード、電子カルテ、健康保険証、住民基本台帳、パスポート、電子ブック等が挙げられる。
[Product application]
The display element of the present invention can be used in an electronic book field, an ID card field, a public field, a traffic field, a broadcast field, a payment field, a distribution logistics field, and the like. Specifically, keys for doors, student ID cards, employee ID cards, various membership cards, convenience store cards, department store cards, vending machine cards, gas station cards, subway and railway cards, bus cards, Cash cards, credit cards, highway cards, driver's licenses, hospital examination cards, electronic medical records, health insurance cards, Basic Resident Registers, passports, electronic books, etc.
以下、実施例を挙げて本発明を具体的に説明するが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。なお、実施例において「部」あるいは「%」の表示を用いるが、特に断りがない限り「質量部」あるいは「質量%」を表す。 Hereinafter, the present invention will be specifically described with reference to examples, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In addition, although the display of "part" or "%" is used in an Example, unless otherwise indicated, "part by mass" or "mass%" is represented.
《電解質の調製》
(電解質1の調製)
プロピレンカーボネートの2.5質量部中に、ビス(トリフルオロメタンスルホニル)イミドリチウムを0.1質量部と、カルボキシTEMPO(4-カルボキシ-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン-1-オキシル フリーラジカル)を0.05質量部溶解して、電解質1を調製した。
<< Preparation of electrolyte >>
(Preparation of electrolyte 1)
In 2.5 parts by mass of propylene carbonate, 0.1 part by mass of bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide lithium and carboxy TEMPO (4-carboxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine-1-oxyl free The electrolyte 1 was prepared by dissolving 0.05 part by mass of radicals.
(電解質2の調製)
ジメチルスルホキシドの2.5質量部中に、塩化ビスマスを0.1質量部と、臭化リチウムを0.2質量部と、テトラブチルアンモニウムパークロレートを0.025質量部溶解して、電解質2を調製した。
(Preparation of electrolyte 2)
In 2.5 parts by mass of dimethyl sulfoxide, 0.1 part by mass of bismuth chloride, 0.2 part by mass of lithium bromide, and 0.025 part by mass of tetrabutylammonium perchlorate are dissolved, and
(電解質3の調製)
ジメチルスルホキシドの2.5質量部中に、ビス(トリフルオロメタンスルホニル)イミドリチウムを0.1質量部と、p-トルエンスルホン酸銀を0.1質量部溶解して、電解質3を調製した。
(Preparation of electrolyte 3)
(電解質4の調製)
ジメチルスルホキシドの2.5質量部中に、ビス(トリフルオロメタンスルホニル)イミドリチウムを0.1質量部と、p-トルエンスルホン酸銀を0.1質量部と、例示化合物(G1-3)を0.2質量部溶解して、電解質4を調製した。
(Preparation of electrolyte 4)
In 2.5 parts by mass of dimethyl sulfoxide, 0.1 part by mass of bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide lithium, 0.1 part by mass of silver p-toluenesulfonate, and 0% of exemplary compound (G1-3)
(電解質5の調製)
ジメチルスルホキシドの2.5質量部中に、ビス(トリフルオロメタンスルホニル)イミドリチウムを0.1質量部と、p-トルエンスルホン酸銀を0.1質量部と、例示化合物(G2-12)を0.2質量部溶解して、電解質5を調製した。
(Preparation of electrolyte 5)
In 2.5 parts by mass of dimethyl sulfoxide, 0.1 part by mass of bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide lithium, 0.1 part by mass of silver p-toluenesulfonate, and 0% of exemplary compound (G2-12) Electrolyte 5 was prepared by dissolving 2 parts by mass.
(電解質6の調製)
プロピレンカーボネートの25質量部中に、ビス(トリフルオロメタンスルホニル)イミドリチウムを7.0質量部と、ピロールを0.2質量部溶解させて、電解質6を得た。
(Preparation of electrolyte 6)
In 25 parts by mass of propylene carbonate, 7.0 parts by mass of bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide lithium and 0.2 parts by mass of pyrrole were dissolved to obtain an electrolyte 6.
《電極の作製》
(電極1の作製)
厚さが1.5mmで、幅が2cm×4cmのガラス基板上に、導電層として幅1cmのITO(Indium Tin Oxide、インジウム錫酸化物)膜を公知の方法に従って形成して、電極1を作製した。
<Production of electrode>
(Production of electrode 1)
An ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) film having a thickness of 1 cm is formed as a conductive layer on a glass substrate having a thickness of 1.5 mm and a width of 2 cm × 4 cm according to a known method, thereby producing an electrode 1. did.
(電極2の作製)
上記電極1のITO膜形成面上に、下記二酸化チタン分散物を乾燥後の平均膜厚が20μmになるようにスクリーン印刷し、その後50℃で30分間乾燥して溶媒を蒸発させた後、85℃の雰囲気中で1時間乾燥させて、多孔質白色散乱層を有する電極2を作製した。
(Preparation of electrode 2)
On the ITO film-forming surface of the electrode 1, the following titanium dioxide dispersion was screen-printed so that the average film thickness after drying was 20 μm, and then dried at 50 ° C. for 30 minutes to evaporate the solvent. The
〈二酸化チタン分散物の調製〉
水/エタノール(1/1)の混合溶液に、クラレポバールPVA235(クラレ社製、ポリビニルアルコール樹脂)を固形分濃度で2質量%になるように添加し、加熱溶解させた後、二酸化チタンCR-90(石原産業社製)を20質量%となるように超音波分散機で分散させて、二酸化チタン分散物を得た。
<Preparation of titanium dioxide dispersion>
After adding Kuraray Poval PVA235 (manufactured by Kuraray Co., Ltd., polyvinyl alcohol resin) to a water / ethanol (1/1) mixed solution so as to have a solid content concentration of 2% by mass and dissolving with heating, titanium dioxide CR- 90 (manufactured by Ishihara Sangyo Co., Ltd.) was dispersed with an ultrasonic dispersing machine so as to be 20% by mass to obtain a titanium dioxide dispersion.
(電極3の作製)
上記電極1と白金電極とを対向した位置に配置し、この電極対を、電解質6を含むガラス容器中に浸漬し、電極1と白金電極の間に通電電気量が12mC/cm2となるまで3Vの電圧を印加し、ピロールが電解重合して形成されたポリピロール膜を電極1上に形成した。ポリピロール膜が形成された電極1をガラス容器から取り出し、エタノールで洗浄、乾燥させて、これを電極3とした。
(Preparation of electrode 3)
The electrode 1 and the platinum electrode are arranged at positions facing each other, and this electrode pair is immersed in a glass container containing the electrolyte 6 until the amount of electricity supplied between the electrode 1 and the platinum electrode is 12 mC / cm 2. A voltage of 3 V was applied, and a polypyrrole film formed by electrolytic polymerization of pyrrole was formed on the electrode 1. The electrode 1 on which the polypyrrole film was formed was taken out of the glass container, washed with ethanol, and dried to obtain an
(電極4の作製)
上記電極1のITO膜形成面上に、厚み0.085μmの二酸化チタン層(平均粒子径10nmの粒子が4~10個程度ネッキング済み)を形成し、電極4を作製した。
(Preparation of electrode 4)
On the surface of the electrode 1 on which the ITO film was formed, a titanium dioxide layer having a thickness of 0.085 μm (about 4 to 10 particles having an average particle diameter of 10 nm had been necked) was formed, whereby an
(電極5の作製)
上記電極3の作製において、電極1に代えて電極4を用いた以外は同様にして、電極5を作製した。
(Preparation of electrode 5)
An electrode 5 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the
(電極6の作製)
上記電極4を、下記処理液1に浸漬し、室温で約24時間放置した後、エタノールで洗浄、乾燥して、電極6を作製した。
(Preparation of electrode 6)
The
〈処理液1の調製〉
純水の20質量部中に、下記化合物(A-1)の0.05質量部と、下記化合物(A-2)の0.06質量部と、下記化合物(A-3)の0.07質量部とを溶解して、処理液1を調製した。
<Preparation of treatment liquid 1>
In 20 parts by mass of pure water, 0.05 part by mass of the following compound (A-1), 0.06 part by mass of the following compound (A-2), and 0.07 part of the following compound (A-3) A treatment liquid 1 was prepared by dissolving a part by mass.
(電極7の作製)
電極1のITO膜形成面上に、厚み0.075μmの二酸化チタン層(平均粒子径10nmの粒子が4~10個程度ネッキング済み)を形成し、電極7を作製した。
(Preparation of electrode 7)
On the ITO film forming surface of electrode 1, a 0.075 μm thick titanium dioxide layer (about 4 to 10 particles having an average particle diameter of 10 nm had been necked) was formed, and electrode 7 was produced.
(電極8の作製)
上記電極6の作製において、電極4に代えて電極7を用いた以外は同様にして、電極8を作製した。
(Preparation of electrode 8)
An electrode 8 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the electrode 6 except that the electrode 7 was used instead of the
(電極9の作製)
上記電極1と白金電極とを対向した位置に配置し、この電極対を、電解質6を含むガラス容器中に浸漬し、電極1と白金電極の間に通電電気量が40mC/cm2となるまで3Vの電圧を印加し、ピロールが電解重合して形成されたポリピロール膜を電極1上に形成した。ポリピロール膜が形成された電極1をガラス容器から取り出し、エタノールで洗浄、乾燥させて、これを電極9とした。
(Preparation of electrode 9)
The electrode 1 and the platinum electrode are arranged at opposite positions, and this electrode pair is immersed in a glass container containing the electrolyte 6 until the amount of electricity supplied between the electrode 1 and the platinum electrode is 40 mC / cm 2. A voltage of 3 V was applied, and a polypyrrole film formed by electrolytic polymerization of pyrrole was formed on the electrode 1. The electrode 1 on which the polypyrrole film was formed was taken out from the glass container, washed with ethanol, and dried to obtain an electrode 9.
(電極10の作製)
電極1のITO膜形成面上に、厚み1.0μmの二酸化チタン層(平均粒子径10nmの粒子が4~10個程度ネッキング済み)を形成し、電極10を作製した。
(Production of electrode 10)
On the surface of the electrode 1 on which the ITO film was formed, a titanium dioxide layer having a thickness of 1.0 μm (about 4 to 10 particles having an average particle diameter of 10 nm had been necked) was formed.
(電極11の作製)
上記電極9の作製において、電極1に代えて電極10を用いた以外は同様にして、電極11を作製した。
(Preparation of electrode 11)
In the production of the electrode 9, an electrode 11 was produced in the same manner except that the electrode 10 was used instead of the electrode 1.
(電極12の作製)
上記電極6の作製において、電極4に代えて電極10を用いた以外は同様にして、電極12を作製した。
(Preparation of electrode 12)
An electrode 12 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the electrode 6 except that the electrode 10 was used instead of the
(電極13の作製)
上記電極1のITO膜形成面上に、厚み0.06μmの二酸化チタン層(平均粒子径10nmの粒子が4~10個程度ネッキング済み)を形成し、電極13を作製した。
(Preparation of electrode 13)
On the surface of the electrode 1 on which the ITO film was formed, a titanium dioxide layer having a thickness of 0.06 μm (about 4 to 10 particles having an average particle diameter of 10 nm had been necked) was formed, whereby an electrode 13 was produced.
(電極14の作製)
上記電極3の作製において、電極1に代えて電極13を用いた以外は同様にして、電極14を作製した。
(Preparation of electrode 14)
An electrode 14 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the
(電極15の作製)
上記電極4を、下記処理液2に浸漬し、室温で約24時間放置した後、エタノールで洗浄、乾燥して、電極15を作製した。
(Preparation of electrode 15)
The
〈処理液2の調製〉
純水の20質量部中に、エレクトロクロミック化合物として、例示化合物(L19)を0.18質量部溶解して、処理液2を調製した。
<Preparation of
The
(電極16の作製)
上記電極4を、下記処理液3に浸漬し、室温で約24時間放置した後、エタノールで洗浄、乾燥して、電極16を作製した。
(Preparation of electrode 16)
The
〈処理液3の調製〉
純水の20質量部中に、エレクトロクロミック化合物として、例示化合物(L29)を0.18質量部溶解して、処理液3を調製した。
<Preparation of
The
《表示素子の作製》
(表示素子1の作製)
上記作製した電極2の周辺部を、平均粒径40μmのガラス製の球形ビーズを、体積分率として10%含むオレフィン系封止剤で縁取りした後、電極2と電極3とを、それぞれストライプ状の電極が直交するように貼り合わせ、さらに加熱押圧して空セルを作製した。該空セルに電解質1を真空注入し、注入口をエポキシ系の紫外線硬化樹脂にて封止し、表示素子1を作製した。
<< Production of display element >>
(Preparation of display element 1)
The peripheral part of the
(表示素子2の作製)
上記表示素子1の作製において、電極3に代えて電極5を用いた以外は同様にして、表示素子2を作製した。
(Preparation of display element 2)
A
(表示素子3の作製)
上記表示素子1の作製において、電極3に代えて電極6を用いた以外は同様にして、表示素子3を作製した。
(Preparation of display element 3)
A
(表示素子4の作製)
上記表示素子1の作製において、電極3に代えて電極8を用いた以外は同様にして、表示素子4を作製した。
(Preparation of display element 4)
A
(表示素子5の作製)
上記表示素子1の作製において、電解質1に代えて電解質2を、電極3に代えて電極13を用いた以外は同様にして、表示素子5を作製した。
(Preparation of display element 5)
A display element 5 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the display element 1 except that the
(表示素子6の作製)
上記表示素子5の作製において、電解質2に代えて電解質3を用いた以外は同様にして、表示素子6を作製した。
(Preparation of display element 6)
A display element 6 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the display element 5 except that the
(表示素子7の作製)
上記表示素子5の作製において、電解質2に代えて電解質4を用いた以外は同様にして、表示素子7を作製した。
(Preparation of display element 7)
A display element 7 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the display element 5 except that the
(表示素子8の作製)
上記表示素子5の作製において、電解質2に代えて電解質5を用いた以外は同様にして、表示素子8を作製した。
(Preparation of display element 8)
A display element 8 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the display element 5 except that the electrolyte 5 was used instead of the
(表示素子9の作製)
上記表示素子1の作製において、電極3に代えて電極9を用いた以外は同様にして、表示素子9を作製した。
(Preparation of display element 9)
A display element 9 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the display element 1 except that the electrode 9 was used instead of the
(表示素子10の作製)
上記表示素子2の作製において、電極5に代えて電極11を用いた以外は同様にして、表示素子10を作製した。
(Preparation of display element 10)
A display element 10 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the
(表示素子11の作製)
上記表示素子3の作製において、電極6に代えて電極12を用いた以外は同様にして、表示素子11を作製した。
(Preparation of display element 11)
A display element 11 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the
(表示素子12の作製)
上記表示素子5の作製において、電極13に代えて電極1を用いた以外は同様にして、表示素子12を作製した。
(Preparation of display element 12)
A display element 12 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the display element 5 except that the electrode 1 was used instead of the electrode 13.
(表示素子13の作製)
上記表示素子6の作製において、電極13に代えて電極1を用いた以外は同様にして、表示素子13を作製した。
(Preparation of display element 13)
A display element 13 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the display element 6 except that the electrode 1 was used instead of the electrode 13.
(表示素子14の作製)
上記表示素子1の作製において、電極3に代えて電極14を用いた以外は同様にして、表示素子14を作製した。
(Preparation of display element 14)
A display element 14 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the display element 1 except that the electrode 14 was used instead of the
(表示素子15の作製)
上記表示素子6の作製において、電極13に代えて電極4を用いた以外は同様にして、表示素子15を作製した。
(Preparation of display element 15)
A display element 15 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the display element 6 except that the
(表示素子16の作製)
上記表示素子7の作製において、電極13に代えて電極15を用いた以外は同様にして、表示素子16を作製した。
(Preparation of display element 16)
A display element 16 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the display element 7 except that the electrode 15 was used instead of the electrode 13.
(表示素子17の作製)
上記表示素子7の作製において、電極13に代えて電極16を用いた以外は同様にして、表示素子17を作製した。
(Preparation of display element 17)
A display element 17 was produced in the same manner as in the production of the display element 7 except that the electrode 16 was used instead of the electrode 13.
《表示素子の評価》
各表示素子の電圧を印加する前(白表示状態)の、波長550nmにおける反射率をコニカミノルタセンシング社製の分光測色計CM-3700dで測定した。次いで、表示素子の両電極を電気化学測定装置HSV-100(北斗電工製)に接続し、各表示素子に1.5Vの電圧を印加して着色表示させたときの波長550nmにおける反射率を、コニカミノルタセンシング社製の分光測色計CM-3700dで測定した。電圧の印加時間を適宜調整して測定を繰り返し、反射率が電圧印加前の1/10になるまでに消費した電荷量(CR10電荷量(mC/cm2))を測定した。
<< Evaluation of display element >>
The reflectance at a wavelength of 550 nm before applying the voltage of each display element (white display state) was measured with a spectrocolorimeter CM-3700d manufactured by Konica Minolta Sensing. Next, the reflectance at a wavelength of 550 nm when both electrodes of the display element are connected to an electrochemical measuring apparatus HSV-100 (manufactured by Hokuto Denko) and a voltage of 1.5 V is applied to each display element for color display. Measurement was performed with a spectrocolorimeter CM-3700d manufactured by Konica Minolta Sensing. The measurement was repeated by appropriately adjusting the voltage application time, and the amount of charge consumed until the reflectance became 1/10 of the voltage before application (CR10 charge amount (mC / cm 2 )) was measured.
また、各表示素子の電圧を印加する前(白色表示)および着色表示させたときの屈折率(n2、n1)と発色空間の厚さ(d2、d1)を、25℃の環境下で、分光エリプソメーターFE-5000(大塚電子製)を用いて測定し、n1、d1、n2、d2をそれぞれ求めた。
Further, the refractive index (n 2 , n 1 ) and the thickness of the color space (d 2 , d 1 ) before applying the voltage of each display element (white display) and when color display is performed are set to an environment of 25 ° C. below, it was measured using a spectroscopic ellipsometer FE-5000 (manufactured by Otsuka Electronics) to determine n 1, d 1, n 2 ,
得られた結果は表2に示した。CR10電荷量が低いほど、低消費電力で駆動できることを表す。 The results obtained are shown in Table 2. The lower the CR10 charge amount, the lower the power consumption.
表2に記載の結果より明らかな様に、本発明の表示素子は、比較例に対し、CR10電荷量が低く、低消費電力で駆動可能であることが分かる。 As is clear from the results shown in Table 2, it can be seen that the display element of the present invention has a lower CR10 charge amount and can be driven with lower power consumption than the comparative example.
1 表示素子
2 導電性電極
3 多孔質白色散乱層
4 発色空間
5 透明電極
A 発色空間4の上面
B 発色空間4の下面
C 可視光
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1
Claims (9)
式(1)
n2・d2≦90、またはn2・d2≧185
式(2)
100≦n1・d1≦175
〔式中、n1、d1はそれぞれ表示素子が着色(または黒色)表示状態における発色空間の屈折率n1と厚さd1(nm)であり、n2、d2はそれぞれ表示素子が白色表示状態における発色空間の屈折率n2と厚さd2(nm)である。〕 A display element having a color space between at least a pair of opposing electrodes, wherein the color space satisfies the following formulas (1) and (2).
Formula (1)
n 2 · d 2 ≦ 90 or n 2 · d 2 ≧ 185
Formula (2)
100 ≦ n 1 · d 1 ≦ 175
[Where n 1 and d 1 are the refractive index n 1 and thickness d 1 (nm) of the coloring space when the display element is colored (or black), respectively, and n 2 and d 2 are The refractive index n 2 and the thickness d 2 (nm) of the coloring space in the white display state. ]
〔式中、Rl1は置換または無置換のアリール基を表し、Rl2、Rl3は各々水素原子または置換基を表す。Xは>N-Rl4、酸素原子または硫黄原子を表し、Rl4は水素原子または置換基を表す。〕 The display element according to claim 2, wherein the electrochromic compound is a compound represented by the following general formula (L).
[Wherein, Rl 1 represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, and Rl 2 and Rl 3 each represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent. X represents> N—Rl 4 , an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and Rl 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. ]
〔式中、Rl21、Rl22は各々脂肪族基、脂肪族オキシ基、アシルアミノ基、カルバモイル基、アシル基、スルホンアミド基またはスルファモイル基を表し、Rl23は芳香族基または芳香族複素環基を表し、Rl24は水素原子、脂肪族基、芳香族基または芳香族複素環基を表し、Rl25は水素原子、脂肪族基、芳香族基またはアシル基を表す。〕 The display element according to claim 4, wherein the compound represented by the general formula (L) is a compound represented by the following general formula (L2).
Wherein Rl 21 and Rl 22 each represents an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, an acylamino group, a carbamoyl group, an acyl group, a sulfonamide group or a sulfamoyl group, and Rl 23 represents an aromatic group or an aromatic heterocyclic group Rl 24 represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group or an aromatic heterocyclic group, and Rl 25 represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group or an acyl group. ]
一般式(G-1)
Rg11-S-Rg12
〔式中、Rg11、Rg12は各々置換または無置換の炭化水素基を表す。また、これらの炭化水素基は、1個以上の窒素原子、酸素原子、リン原子、硫黄原子またはハロゲン原子を含んでも良く、Rg11とRg12が互いに連結し、環状構造を取っても良い。〕
〔式中、Mは水素原子、金属原子または4級アンモニウムを表す。Zは含窒素複素環を構成するのに必要な原子群表す。nは0~5の整数を表し、Rg21は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、アルキルカルボンアミド基、アリールカルボンアミド基、アルキルスルホンアミド基、アリールスルホンアミド基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、アルキルカルバモイル基、アリールカルバモイル基、カルバモイル基、アルキルスルファモイル基、アリールスルファモイル基、スルファモイル基、シアノ基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、アルキルカルボニル基、アリールカルボニル基、アシルオキシ基、カルボキシル基、カルボニル基、スルホニル基、アミノ基、ヒドロキシ基または複素環基を表し、nが2以上の場合、それぞれのRg21は同じであってもよく、異なってもよく、お互いに連結して縮合環を形成してもよい。〕 The display element according to claim 7 or 8, wherein the electrolyte further contains a compound represented by the following general formula (G-1) or (G-2).
General formula (G-1)
Rg 11 -S-Rg 12
[Wherein, Rg 11 and Rg 12 each represent a substituted or unsubstituted hydrocarbon group. Further, these hydrocarbon groups may contain one or more nitrogen atom, oxygen atom, phosphorus atom, sulfur atom or halogen atom, and Rg 11 and Rg 12 may be connected to each other to take a cyclic structure. ]
[Wherein, M represents a hydrogen atom, a metal atom or quaternary ammonium. Z represents an atomic group necessary for constituting a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring. n represents an integer of 0 to 5, and Rg 21 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkylcarbonamide group, an arylcarbonamide group, an alkylsulfonamide group, an arylsulfonamide group, an alkoxy group, an aryl Oxy group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, alkylcarbamoyl group, arylcarbamoyl group, carbamoyl group, alkylsulfamoyl group, arylsulfamoyl group, sulfamoyl group, cyano group, alkylsulfonyl group, arylsulfonyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group, Represents an aryloxycarbonyl group, an alkylcarbonyl group, an arylcarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carboxyl group, a carbonyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a hydroxy group or a heterocyclic group, and when n is 2 or more, Of Rg 21 may be the same or different, and may be linked to each other to form a condensed ring. ]
Priority Applications (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP2011552732A JPWO2011096298A1 (en) | 2010-02-08 | 2011-01-25 | Display element |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP2010-025302 | 2010-02-08 | ||
| JP2010025302 | 2010-02-08 |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2011096298A1 true WO2011096298A1 (en) | 2011-08-11 |
Family
ID=44355299
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/JP2011/051288 Ceased WO2011096298A1 (en) | 2010-02-08 | 2011-01-25 | Display element |
Country Status (2)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| JP (1) | JPWO2011096298A1 (en) |
| WO (1) | WO2011096298A1 (en) |
Cited By (4)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP2015052733A (en) * | 2013-09-09 | 2015-03-19 | 株式会社リコー | Electrochromic material, electrochromic composition, and electrochromic display element |
| CN108172900A (en) * | 2017-12-18 | 2018-06-15 | 中节能万润股份有限公司 | A kind of novel lithium salt and its preparation method and application |
| EP3731011A4 (en) * | 2019-02-27 | 2021-06-30 | Suzhou Institute of Nano-Tech and Nano-Bionics (Sinano), Chinese Academy of Scie | POLYCHROMIC ELECTROCHROMIC STRUCTURE, ITS PREPARATION PROCESS AND ITS APPLICATION |
| JP2025512164A (en) * | 2023-02-08 | 2025-04-17 | 中国科学院蘇州納米技術与納米▲ファン▼生研究所 | Full-color reversibly switchable electrically controlled color-changing device, its manufacturing method and use |
Citations (6)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JPS54101345A (en) * | 1978-01-26 | 1979-08-09 | Minolta Camera Co Ltd | Electrochromic element of less reflection loss |
| JPS561014A (en) * | 1979-06-18 | 1981-01-08 | Furukawa Electric Co Ltd:The | Optical filter of controllable transmission characteristic |
| JPH01277826A (en) * | 1988-04-30 | 1989-11-08 | Toyoda Gosei Co Ltd | Electrochromic light control plate |
| JP2003195364A (en) * | 2001-12-26 | 2003-07-09 | Shibuya Kogyo Co Ltd | Optical component and optical switch using the same |
| JP2007241178A (en) * | 2006-03-13 | 2007-09-20 | Konica Minolta Holdings Inc | Display element |
| WO2009037971A1 (en) * | 2007-09-18 | 2009-03-26 | Konica Minolta Holdings, Inc. | Display element |
Family Cites Families (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| EP0818706A2 (en) * | 1996-07-09 | 1998-01-14 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Switchable devices with an optical cavity |
| JP2009069479A (en) * | 2007-09-13 | 2009-04-02 | Konica Minolta Holdings Inc | Display element |
| JP2010020149A (en) * | 2008-07-11 | 2010-01-28 | Konica Minolta Holdings Inc | Method of manufacturing display element |
-
2011
- 2011-01-25 JP JP2011552732A patent/JPWO2011096298A1/en active Pending
- 2011-01-25 WO PCT/JP2011/051288 patent/WO2011096298A1/en not_active Ceased
Patent Citations (6)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JPS54101345A (en) * | 1978-01-26 | 1979-08-09 | Minolta Camera Co Ltd | Electrochromic element of less reflection loss |
| JPS561014A (en) * | 1979-06-18 | 1981-01-08 | Furukawa Electric Co Ltd:The | Optical filter of controllable transmission characteristic |
| JPH01277826A (en) * | 1988-04-30 | 1989-11-08 | Toyoda Gosei Co Ltd | Electrochromic light control plate |
| JP2003195364A (en) * | 2001-12-26 | 2003-07-09 | Shibuya Kogyo Co Ltd | Optical component and optical switch using the same |
| JP2007241178A (en) * | 2006-03-13 | 2007-09-20 | Konica Minolta Holdings Inc | Display element |
| WO2009037971A1 (en) * | 2007-09-18 | 2009-03-26 | Konica Minolta Holdings, Inc. | Display element |
Cited By (6)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP2015052733A (en) * | 2013-09-09 | 2015-03-19 | 株式会社リコー | Electrochromic material, electrochromic composition, and electrochromic display element |
| CN108172900A (en) * | 2017-12-18 | 2018-06-15 | 中节能万润股份有限公司 | A kind of novel lithium salt and its preparation method and application |
| CN108172900B (en) * | 2017-12-18 | 2019-08-16 | 中节能万润股份有限公司 | A kind of new lithium salts and its preparation method and application |
| EP3731011A4 (en) * | 2019-02-27 | 2021-06-30 | Suzhou Institute of Nano-Tech and Nano-Bionics (Sinano), Chinese Academy of Scie | POLYCHROMIC ELECTROCHROMIC STRUCTURE, ITS PREPARATION PROCESS AND ITS APPLICATION |
| JP2025512164A (en) * | 2023-02-08 | 2025-04-17 | 中国科学院蘇州納米技術与納米▲ファン▼生研究所 | Full-color reversibly switchable electrically controlled color-changing device, its manufacturing method and use |
| JP7698913B2 (en) | 2023-02-08 | 2025-06-26 | 中国科学院蘇州納米技術与納米▲ファン▼生研究所 | Full-color reversibly switchable electrically controlled color-changing device, its manufacturing method and use |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| JPWO2011096298A1 (en) | 2013-06-10 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| JP4877228B2 (en) | Electrochromic display element and full-color electrochromic display element | |
| WO2011096298A1 (en) | Display element | |
| JP5472104B2 (en) | Display element and manufacturing method thereof | |
| JP2010085569A (en) | Electrochemical device and polymeric material | |
| JP2010085570A (en) | Electrochemical device and polymeric material | |
| JP2009300494A (en) | Electrode for electrochemical display element and display element | |
| JP2011150054A (en) | Display element | |
| JP5704161B2 (en) | Display element | |
| JP2010085568A (en) | Electrochemical device and polymeric material | |
| WO2010058684A1 (en) | Display element | |
| JPWO2009013976A1 (en) | Display element | |
| WO2010010814A1 (en) | Display element and method for forming porous layer of display element | |
| JP2011090182A (en) | Display element | |
| JP5177218B2 (en) | Display element | |
| JP5532923B2 (en) | Display element | |
| JP5568990B2 (en) | Display element | |
| JP2010085571A (en) | Method of manufacturing electrode for electrochemical display element, and electrochemical display element | |
| JP5458484B2 (en) | Display element | |
| JP5287849B2 (en) | Display element | |
| JP5158191B2 (en) | Display element | |
| JP2010020149A (en) | Method of manufacturing display element | |
| JP5315746B2 (en) | Display element | |
| JP2010072517A (en) | Method of manufacturing display element | |
| JP2009098225A (en) | Display element | |
| JP2011048234A (en) | Display element |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 11739647 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
| WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 2011552732 Country of ref document: JP |
|
| NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
| 122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 11739647 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |